02.07.2014 Views

Owner's Manual Cadillac BLS - IFS Europe BV

Owner's Manual Cadillac BLS - IFS Europe BV

Owner's Manual Cadillac BLS - IFS Europe BV

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

460_OM_MY09.book Page 1 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

1<br />

Owner’s <strong>Manual</strong><br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> <strong>BLS</strong><br />

Safety 15<br />

Locks and car alarm 45<br />

Instruments and controls 61<br />

Interior equipment 95<br />

Starting and driving 123<br />

Car care 173<br />

Technical data 235<br />

Index 255<br />

© Copyright General Motors Corporation 2008<br />

All Rights Reserved<br />

Printed in Sweden


460_OM_MY09.book Page 2 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

2<br />

Introduction<br />

This manual provides practical guidance on<br />

driving and caring for your <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

Although this manual describes the most<br />

important differences between model variants,<br />

it does not include their precise specifications.<br />

Some differences also occur to<br />

meet national legal requirements.<br />

This manual contains important warning<br />

texts that must always be observed:<br />

WARNING<br />

WARNING texts warn against the danger<br />

of injury if the specified instructions are<br />

not followed.<br />

NOTICE<br />

NOTICE texts warn of potential damage<br />

to your car if the recommendations are<br />

not followed.<br />

We recommend that you read through this<br />

manual before taking the car out for the first<br />

time and that you keep it in the car for future<br />

reference.<br />

Finding your way around this manual is<br />

simple. To find a specific item, use the<br />

search pages at the start of the manual.<br />

A list of contents is provided at the beginning<br />

of each section and there is a comprehensive<br />

alphabetical index at the back of<br />

the manual.<br />

A Warranty and Service Book is supplied<br />

when the car is delivered. This specifies<br />

the regular maintenance to be carried out<br />

and also contains important information on<br />

warranty conditions.<br />

Since the policy at <strong>Cadillac</strong> is one of continual<br />

improvement, we retain the right to<br />

incorporate modifications and to alter specifications<br />

during production without prior<br />

notice.<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all<br />

cars (can depend on model variant, engine<br />

variant, market specification, options or<br />

accessories).<br />

An authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer would be<br />

glad to help with any queries you may have<br />

concerning your car’s functions, care,<br />

warranty, etc.<br />

Best wishes,<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> does not assume responsibility for any<br />

damage that may arise from the use of spare<br />

parts, replacement parts or accessories that have<br />

not been approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

The specifications, design particulars and illustrations<br />

included in the manual are not binding.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 3 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instrument panel, LHD<br />

Settings _____________________ 75<br />

DIC ________________________ 71<br />

Fuel gauge___________________ 70<br />

Speedometer_________________ 69<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

Warning and indicator lights _____ 62<br />

Rev counter __________________ 69<br />

Milometer and trip meter ________ 71<br />

3<br />

Direction indicators _______ 81<br />

Cruise control ___________ 144<br />

Dip switch ______________ 78<br />

Rear fog light ____________ 80<br />

Front fog lights___________ 81<br />

Main/dipped beam________ 78<br />

Changing bulbs __________ 190<br />

Headlight levelling ________ 79<br />

Position lights ___________ 78<br />

Dim-dipped beam ________ 78<br />

Changing wiper blades ____ 188<br />

Wash/wipe _____________ 83<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic climate control __ 87<br />

Car care and maintenance _ 233<br />

Seat heating ____________ 93<br />

Hazard warning lights_____ 82<br />

Ashtray _____________________ 107<br />

Cigarette lighter _______________ 107


460_OM_MY09.book Page 4 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

4<br />

Instrument panel, RHD Fuel gauge___________________ 70<br />

Speedometer_________________ 69<br />

Settings _____________________ 75<br />

DIC ________________________ 71<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

Warning and indicator lights _____ 62<br />

Rev counter __________________ 69<br />

Milometer and trip meter ________ 71<br />

Direction indicators _______ 81<br />

Cruise control ___________ 144<br />

Dip switch ______________ 78<br />

Changing wiper blades ____ 188<br />

Wash/wipe _____________ 83<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic climate control __ 87<br />

Car care and maintenance _ 233<br />

Seat heating ____________ 93<br />

Hazard warning lights _____ 82<br />

Rear fog light ___________ 80<br />

Front fog lights __________ 81<br />

Main/dipped beam _______ 78<br />

Changing bulbs__________ 190<br />

Headlight levelling _______ 79<br />

Position lights ___________ 78<br />

Dim-dipped beam ________ 78<br />

Ashtray _____________________ 107<br />

Cigarette lighter _______________ 107


460_OM_MY09.book Page 5 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Exterior<br />

Body __________________ 230<br />

Touching up paintwork_____ 230<br />

Anti-corrosion treatment ___ 231<br />

Service programme_______ 232<br />

Sunroof ________________ 102<br />

Washing _______________ 228<br />

Waxing and polishing _____ 230<br />

Tail lights _______________ 198<br />

Brake lights _____________ 198<br />

Changing bulbs __________ 190<br />

Light switches ___________ 78<br />

Luggage compartment ____ 110<br />

Lighting ________________ 198<br />

Folding down the rear seat _ 110<br />

Load-through hatch _______ 111<br />

Spare wheel ____________ 113<br />

Tools __________________ 113<br />

Towing _________________ 167<br />

Towing eyes_____________ 167<br />

Towing a caravan or trailer__ 163<br />

Maximum loads _______________ 236<br />

Mounting holes for roof carriers ___ 166<br />

Roof load ____________________ 166<br />

Braking _____________________ 146<br />

Tyres _______________________ 210<br />

Tyre pressure ________________ 245<br />

Wheels______________________ 241<br />

Changing wheels ______________ 219<br />

Spare wheel__________________ 216<br />

Winter driving_________________ 160<br />

5<br />

Bonnet ______________________ 174<br />

Washing the engine bay_________ 230<br />

Front lights _____________ 193<br />

Direction indicators_______ 81<br />

Changing bulbs__________ 190<br />

Headlight levelling _______ 79<br />

Dip switch ______________ 78<br />

Headlight switches _______ 78<br />

Headlight washers _______ 189<br />

Central locking __________ 46<br />

Luggage compartment<br />

lock __________________ 50<br />

Lock buttons ____________ 46<br />

Child safety locks ________ 51<br />

Fuel grade _____________ 239<br />

Fuel gauge _____________ 70<br />

Economical motoring _____ 158<br />

Fuel filler flap ___________ 133<br />

Refuelling ______________ 133


460_OM_MY09.book Page 6 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

6<br />

Interior<br />

Interior rear view mirror _________ 101<br />

Vanity mirror _________________ 106<br />

Door mirrors__________________ 100<br />

Interior lighting: changing bulbs ___ 202<br />

Interior light switches ___________ 105<br />

Sunroof _____________________ 102<br />

Airbag _________________ 34<br />

Steering wheel adjustment _ 96<br />

Airbag_________________ 34<br />

Child seats _____________ 27<br />

Seat belts ______________ 16<br />

Seat belt care ___________ 227<br />

Child safety locks ________ 51<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Glove compartment ______ 108<br />

Storage compartments ____ 108<br />

Electric windows _________ 97<br />

Automatic transmission ___ 138<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox _________ 137<br />

Changing gears _________ 137<br />

Rear seat____________________ 110<br />

Child seats __________________ 27<br />

Seat belts ___________________ 16<br />

Folding down the rear seat ______ 110<br />

Upholstery care _______________ 228<br />

Seat adjustment ______________ 21<br />

Seat heating _________________ 93<br />

Running-in ___________________ 137<br />

Driving in hot/cold climates ______ 160<br />

Parking _____________________ 153<br />

Starting the engine ____________ 126<br />

Ignition switch ________________ 124<br />

Handbrake ___________________ 152


460_OM_MY09.book Page 7 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Engine bay,<br />

turbo petrol engine<br />

Engine: description ____________ 175<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Radiator_____________________ 238<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

7<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Spark plugs _____________ 240<br />

Ignition system __________ 240<br />

Engine oil: checking level __ 180<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 189<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic transmission _________ 138<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Power steering________________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 185<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 8 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

8<br />

Engine bay,<br />

petrol engine V6<br />

Engine: description ____________ 177<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Cooling system, coolant capacity__ 238<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

Power steering___________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up__ 185<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Spark plugs _____________ 240<br />

Ignition system __________ 240<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 188<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

Automatic transmission _________ 138<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Engine oil: checking level________ 180<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 9 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Engine bay,<br />

diesel engine TiD 3<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

Engine: description ____________ 175<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Radiator_____________________ 238<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

9<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Engine oil: checking level __ 180<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 189<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Power steering________________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 185<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 10 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

10<br />

Engine bay,<br />

diesel engine, TTiD 3<br />

Vehicle identification<br />

number________________ 247<br />

Colour code_____________ 247<br />

Engine number __________ 247<br />

Warning labels___________ 11<br />

Gearbox number _________ 247<br />

Engine: description ____________ 175<br />

Engine oil: topping up __________ 180<br />

Engine: technical data __________ 238<br />

Important considerations for<br />

driving______________________ 129<br />

Coolant: checking/topping-up ____ 182<br />

Driving in hot climates __________ 162<br />

Radiator_____________________ 238<br />

Temperature gauge ____________ 69<br />

ABS brakes_____________ 146<br />

Braking lining ___________ 184<br />

Brake system ___________ 240<br />

Brake fluid______________ 184<br />

Exhaust emission control __ 130<br />

Drive belt _______________ 188<br />

Simple troubleshooting<br />

(A/C, ACC) _____________ 233<br />

Alternator_______________ 188<br />

Changing a fuse _________ 204<br />

Fuses _________________ 204<br />

Relays ________________ 208<br />

Fuse table______________ 208<br />

Engine oil: checking level __ 180<br />

Wash/wipe stalk switch____ 83<br />

Topping-up fluid _________ 189<br />

Washer jets_____________ 190<br />

Washer fluid ____________ 189<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox_______________ 137<br />

Power steering________________ 185<br />

Fluid: checking/topping up_______ 185<br />

Battery ______________________ 186<br />

Battery charge ________________ 186<br />

Jump starting _________________ 170


460_OM_MY09.book Page 11 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

11<br />

Warning labels<br />

Radiator fan<br />

Radiator fan may start at any time.<br />

Fuel-driven heater 3<br />

Switch off the parking heater before<br />

adding fuel.<br />

A/C system<br />

Refrigerant at high pressure.<br />

Do not loosen or remove the A/C system fittings before discharging the A/C<br />

system. Improper service methods may cause personal injury. System to be<br />

serviced by qualified personnel only. For instructions consult workshop<br />

manual.<br />

The A/C system complies with SAE J639.<br />

Charge: 680 g R134a.<br />

Compressor oil: PAG Oil SP-10.<br />

LEVEL INDICATOR<br />

DARK OK<br />

CLEAR<br />

LOW<br />

P/N 127 93 955<br />

Maintenance Free<br />

12V 60Ah 580A (EN)<br />

000 A-12102-EP<br />

Battery<br />

• No sparks, naked flames or smoking<br />

• Always shield eyes. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury<br />

• Keep the battery out of reach of children<br />

• The battery contains sulphuric acid which could cause blindness or serious burn injuries<br />

• See the Owner’s <strong>Manual</strong> for further information<br />

• Explosive gas may be present in the vicinity of the battery.<br />

Coolant<br />

Never open hot!


460_OM_MY09.book Page 12 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

12<br />

• NEVER fit a child seat in front of the passenger<br />

AIRBAG.<br />

• DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur.<br />

Changing wheels<br />

• Only use the jack for the models specified.<br />

• Load the jack with a maximum of 1100 kg.<br />

• Only use the jack on a level and firm surface.<br />

• Do not crawl under a car raised by a jack; use<br />

axle stands.<br />

• There must no one inside the car.<br />

We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for<br />

Xenon bulb replacement 3.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 13 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

13<br />

Example of symbols that can be found in your car<br />

No sparks,<br />

flames or<br />

smoking<br />

Buckle up<br />

Headlights<br />

Windscreen<br />

wipers<br />

Coolant<br />

temperature<br />

Radiator fan<br />

Refer to the<br />

Owner’s<br />

<strong>Manual</strong><br />

Airbag<br />

Direction<br />

indicators<br />

Windscreen<br />

washers<br />

No charge to<br />

battery<br />

Fuel<br />

Shield eyes<br />

Never place a<br />

rear-facing<br />

child seat in<br />

this seat<br />

Position lights<br />

Defroster<br />

Foot brake<br />

Automatic tyre<br />

pressure monitoring<br />

3<br />

Keep out of<br />

reach of<br />

children<br />

Electric<br />

windows<br />

Hazard<br />

warning lights<br />

Rear window<br />

heating<br />

Coolant level<br />

Battery acid<br />

contains<br />

sulphuric acid<br />

Deactivation<br />

of rear window<br />

switches<br />

Front fog lights<br />

Cabin fan<br />

Engine oil<br />

pressure<br />

Risk of<br />

explosive gas<br />

Central<br />

locking, lock<br />

Rear fog light<br />

ABS brakes<br />

Central<br />

locking,<br />

unlock<br />

TCS/<br />

StabiliTrak ®<br />

Boot lid,<br />

unlock<br />

Preheater plug<br />

(cars with<br />

diesel engine)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 14 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

14<br />

(This page has been left blank.)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 15 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

15<br />

Safety<br />

Seat belts _____________ 16<br />

Seats ________________ 21<br />

Head restraints ________ 26<br />

Child safety ___________ 27<br />

Airbag________________ 34<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 16 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

16 Safety<br />

Seat belts<br />

WARNING<br />

• Buckle up and adjust your seat belt<br />

before driving off so that you can pay<br />

full attention to the traffic.<br />

• Seat belts must be worn at all times<br />

by all car occupants. Child safety, see<br />

page 27.<br />

• Check that the belt tongue engages<br />

securely in the belt lock.<br />

• In the event of a collision, rear seat<br />

passengers not wearing seat belts will<br />

be thrown forward against the front<br />

seat backrests. This will multiply the<br />

stresses imposed on the front seat<br />

passengers and belts and can result in<br />

needless injury or even death to all car<br />

occupants.<br />

Three-point inertia reel seat belts are provided<br />

for all seats.<br />

Research has established that it is equally<br />

as dangerous for rear seat passengers not<br />

to wear their seat belts as for front seat passengers.<br />

Bear in mind that in certain countries it is a<br />

legal requirement for all occupants of the<br />

car to wear a seat belt.<br />

Seat belt reminder<br />

When the ignition is switched on, the seat<br />

belt reminder in the main instrument panel<br />

illuminates and the message Use your<br />

seatbelt. appears in DIC if the driver has not<br />

buckled his/her seat belt.<br />

The seat belt reminder for the passenger<br />

appears in the centre portion of the instrument<br />

panel.<br />

The seat belt reminder for the driver and any<br />

front passenger will re initiate when vehicle<br />

speed exceeds 25 km/h.<br />

If you still do not buckle up, a "ding-dong"<br />

reminder will sound after a further<br />

30 seconds.<br />

Some seat belt reminders may differ from<br />

that which is described above depending on<br />

market requirements, etc.<br />

Driver seat belt reminder


460_OM_MY09.book Page 17 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

17<br />

Correct seating position<br />

Correct position for seat belt<br />

WARNING<br />

• If the wearer slides underneath the<br />

belt in a collision, injury may result<br />

from the hip strap cutting into the<br />

abdomen. Make sure that the hip strap<br />

is properly tensioned.<br />

• Two people must never share one<br />

seat belt. In the event of a collision<br />

those sharing a belt risk being crushed<br />

together and injured.<br />

• Never fasten the seat belt with the<br />

diagonal strap behind the body, pull<br />

the strap off the shoulder or place the<br />

strap under the arm.<br />

• Position the hip strap snugly and low<br />

across the hips so that it just touches the<br />

thighs. The diagonal strap must be as far<br />

in on the shoulder as possible.<br />

• Check to ensure that the belt is not twisted<br />

or rubbing against any sharp edges.<br />

• There should not be any slack in the belt.<br />

Pull the strap tight - particularly important<br />

when thick outdoor clothing is worn.<br />

• Refrain from tilting the backrest too far<br />

back as the seat belt provides best protection<br />

when the seat is in the normal, upright<br />

position.<br />

• Only one person per seat belt!<br />

• For most of the time a seat belt is worn,<br />

the reel will allow the wearer freedom of<br />

movement. The reel locks up automatically<br />

if the strap is jerked or withdrawn<br />

sharply, the car tilts heavily, the brakes are<br />

applied hard or a collision occurs.<br />

• Specially adapted safety equipment<br />

should be used until the child is 140 cm<br />

tall.<br />

• Children who have grown out of child<br />

seats should use the car’s standard threepoint<br />

seat belts.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 18 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

18 Safety<br />

Buckling up Press the red button to release the belt Front belt guide<br />

Front seat belts<br />

Fasten the belt by smoothly pulling out the<br />

strap and inserting the tongue into the<br />

buckle. Check that the tongue is securely<br />

fastened in the belt buckle.<br />

Position the hip strap low across the hips.<br />

Take hold of the diagonal strap close to the<br />

buckle and pull the belt up towards the<br />

shoulder to tighten the hip strap.<br />

Position the diagonal strap as far in on the<br />

shoulder as possible.<br />

Press the red button on the buckle to<br />

release the belt.<br />

The front seat belts have their lower<br />

anchorage points on the seats. The seat<br />

belts follow the seats when the legroom is<br />

adjusted.<br />

Refer to page 227 for how to check the function<br />

of the seat belts, cleaning and suchlike.<br />

Belt guide<br />

The belt guide for the front seat belts can be<br />

adjusted to different heights.<br />

Adjust the belt so that it is as high up as possible.<br />

To avoid chaffing in the case of a short<br />

person, the guide can be lowered until the<br />

belt is a few centimetres from the neck while<br />

still providing safe restraint.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 19 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

19<br />

Raise the belt guide by pushing it upwards<br />

to the desired position. To lower it, depress<br />

the catch release button while lowering the<br />

guide. Check that the guide locks in its new<br />

position.<br />

Expectant mothers<br />

Expectant mothers should position the belt<br />

in such a way that it never exerts pressure<br />

on the stomach. The hip strap should be<br />

placed as low as possible across the hips.<br />

Seat belt pretensioners<br />

WARNING<br />

If the car is involved in a collision, the seat<br />

belts, seat belt pretensioners and other<br />

components must be inspected at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Never make any alterations or repairs to<br />

the seat belts yourself. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

The seat belts of the front seats have pretensioners<br />

and force limiters. These are<br />

deployed in the event of a severe head-on<br />

collision or in a side-on collision. The seat<br />

belt pretensioners are only deployed if the<br />

seat belt is buckled.<br />

The seat belt pretensioners are not activated<br />

should the car roll over.<br />

The seat belt pretensioners serve to reduce<br />

the forward movement of the body by tensioning<br />

the belt. The force limiters reduce<br />

belt loads on the body by "slackening" the<br />

seat belt slightly to absorb the body’s kinetic<br />

energy as gradually as possible.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 20 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

20 Safety<br />

Seat belts, rear seat<br />

WARNING<br />

• Take care that the belt does not<br />

become trapped when the backrest is<br />

folded down or raised, see page 110.<br />

• If you must place an item of luggage<br />

on a seat, ensure that it is secured<br />

properly with the seat belt. This<br />

reduces the risk of its being sent flying<br />

and causing injury in the event of a collision.<br />

• Protect the belt from sharp edges.<br />

• Make sure you use the correct seat<br />

belt buckle. The buckles for the centre<br />

and left-hand rear seats are close<br />

together.<br />

The three rear seats all have three-point<br />

seat belts with inertia reels.<br />

Fasten the belt by smoothly pulling out the<br />

strap and inserting the tongue into the<br />

buckle. Check that the tongue is securely<br />

fastened.<br />

Take hold of the diagonal strap close to the<br />

buckle and pull the belt up towards the<br />

shoulder to tighten the hip strap. Position<br />

the hip strap low across the hips.<br />

Seat belts, rear seat. The centre head restraint is optional<br />

Position the diagonal strap as far in on the<br />

shoulder as possible.<br />

Press the red button on the buckle to<br />

release the belt.<br />

Refer to page 227 for how to check the function<br />

of the seat belts, cleaning and suchlike.<br />

Securing an item on the rear seat


460_OM_MY09.book Page 21 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Seats<br />

WARNING<br />

Only adjust the driver’s seat when the car<br />

is stationary.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly adjusted front seats<br />

The following seat adjustments can be<br />

made to achieve a comfortable seating<br />

position:<br />

• Height 3<br />

• Legroom<br />

• Backrest rake angle<br />

• Lumbar support firmness 3<br />

• Head restraint height<br />

We recommend that you adjust the driver’s<br />

seat in the following order:<br />

1 Height<br />

2 Legroom<br />

3 Backrest rake angle<br />

4 Head restraint height<br />

Lastly, adjust the position of the steering<br />

wheel, see page 96.<br />

Electrically adjustable front seats 3<br />

See page 23.<br />

Electric heating, front seats 3<br />

See pages 93.<br />

Height adjustment<br />

Height setting 3<br />

Safety<br />

21<br />

Adjust the height of the seat with the lever<br />

on the side of the seat.<br />

Raise the lever repeatedly to raise the seat.<br />

Press down the lever repeatedly to lower<br />

the seat.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 22 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

22 Safety<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

Adjusting the backrest<br />

Lumbar support adjustment<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

WARNING<br />

Check that the seat is locked in its new<br />

position. If not, the seat may move while<br />

the car is being driven and cause injury to<br />

car occupants in the event of a collision.<br />

Adjust the legroom with the lever on the<br />

front edge of the seat.<br />

Backrest rake angle<br />

WARNING<br />

The backrest should be upright for<br />

driving, so that the seat belt, airbag and<br />

backrest can provide optimum protection<br />

in the event of emergency braking or a<br />

collision, particularly from the rear.<br />

Adjust the rake angle of the backrest by<br />

turning the wheel.<br />

Lumbar support 3<br />

Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by<br />

turning the wheel.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 23 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

23<br />

Electrically adjustable front<br />

seats 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• The seats are actuated by powerful<br />

motors. Make sure that nothing can be<br />

trapped or damaged when adjusting<br />

the seat.<br />

• Bear in mind that children can be<br />

injured if they play with the electrically<br />

adjustable seats.<br />

• Always remove the ignition key<br />

(remote control) when you leave the<br />

car to prevent personal injury caused<br />

by the operation of the electrically<br />

adjustable seats, for example, due to<br />

children playing. Refer to page 24 for<br />

information on the electrically operated<br />

seat with memory.<br />

For safety reasons, the seats can only be<br />

adjusted when the ignition is in position 3.<br />

To facilitate getting into the car, both seats<br />

can be adjusted when either of the front<br />

doors is open. The seats can also be<br />

adjusted up to 2 minutes after both doors<br />

have been closed (applicable only to<br />

cars without window and sunroof pinch<br />

protection).<br />

Height and angle adjustment<br />

Height adjustment and seat<br />

angle<br />

Adjust the height of the seat with the rear<br />

section of the front lever.<br />

Adjust the angle of the seat with the front<br />

section of the front lever.<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

Legroom adjustment<br />

Adjust the legroom with the front lever.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 24 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

24 Safety<br />

Adjusting the backrest Lumbar support adjustment Memory function buttons<br />

Backrest rake angle<br />

WARNING<br />

The backrest should be upright for<br />

driving, so that the seat belt, airbag and<br />

backrest can provide optimum protection<br />

in the event of emergency braking or a<br />

collision, particularly from the rear.<br />

Adjust the rake angle of the backrest with<br />

the rear lever.<br />

Lumbar support 3<br />

Adjust the firmness of the lumbar support by<br />

turning the wheel.<br />

Memory function 3<br />

WARNING<br />

The legroom of the electrically operated<br />

driver’s seat can always be adjusted,<br />

whether or not a front door is open and<br />

irrespective of the position of the ignition<br />

switch.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 25 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

25<br />

When the ignition is ON, all seat settings<br />

can be adjusted. When the door is open and<br />

before the remote control has been inserted<br />

into the ignition switch, all seat settings can<br />

be adjusted for up to 20 minutes.<br />

The memory also includes the door mirror<br />

settings.<br />

Storing and restoring settings<br />

1 Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.<br />

The lumbar support is not included by<br />

the memory function.<br />

2 Press and hold the M-button and then<br />

press one of the preset buttons (1, 2<br />

or 3). A chime will sound to confirm that<br />

the settings have been saved.<br />

To recall programmed settings, press and<br />

hold the required preset button while the<br />

seat and door mirrors adopt their programmed<br />

positions. The memory function<br />

also includes the door mirror settings.<br />

To facilitate reversing, the passenger-side<br />

door mirror can be angled down, refer to<br />

page 100.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 26 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

26 Safety<br />

Head restraints<br />

WARNING<br />

• Adjust the head restraint height so that<br />

your head is optimally supported, thus<br />

reducing the likelihood of whiplash<br />

injury in the event of an accident.<br />

• Raise the head restraint of the seats<br />

that are occupied.<br />

The front seats are equipped with active<br />

head restraints, which reduce the risk of<br />

whiplash injury in the event of a rear-end<br />

collision.<br />

The active head restraints are mechanical<br />

and are activated by boy weight. The mechanism<br />

is integrated in the backrest and is<br />

connected to the head restraint.<br />

In the event of a rear-end collision, the body<br />

is forced back against the backrest. This,<br />

in turn, causes the mechanism to press<br />

the head restraint forwards and upwards,<br />

thus limiting the backward movement of<br />

the head.<br />

Lowering the front head restraints<br />

The active head restraints do not normally<br />

require replacement after a rear-end collision.<br />

The front and rear head restraints can be<br />

raised and lowered to a number of positions.<br />

• To raise:<br />

take hold of the head restraint on both<br />

sides and pull it straight up.<br />

Lowering the rear head restraints<br />

• To lower:<br />

front head restraint: press in and hold the<br />

left catch depressed while lowering the<br />

head restraint.<br />

rear head restraint: press the head<br />

restraint forwards and downwards.<br />

To improve rearward visibility, the rear head<br />

restraints can be lowered when the seats<br />

are unoccupied.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 27 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Child safety<br />

WARNING<br />

• Children must always be suitably<br />

restrained in the car.<br />

• NEVER fit a child seat in<br />

front of the passenger<br />

AIRBAG.<br />

• DEATH or SERIOUS<br />

INJURY can occur.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never leave children unattended in<br />

the car, not even for a short period of<br />

time.<br />

– Children and animals can suffer heat<br />

stroke, and even die, in a very short<br />

space of time.<br />

– Children can cause the car to move<br />

and injure themselves and others.<br />

• Remove the remote control from the<br />

car when refuelling.<br />

• Do not let children climb onto or under<br />

the car.<br />

• Make sure no children are standing<br />

behind the car when reversing into or<br />

out of a garage or driveway.<br />

• Never let the car idle in a garage due<br />

to the risk of carbon monoxide poisoning.<br />

• Keep an eye on children while<br />

washing the car. Small children can<br />

drown in a matter of minutes in only<br />

small quantities of water.<br />

Safety<br />

WARNING<br />

27<br />

Make sure children do not get locked<br />

in the luggage compartment<br />

• Teach children not to play in or around<br />

cars.<br />

• Keep an eye on children when loading<br />

or unloading the luggage compartment<br />

to prevent inadvertently locking<br />

children in the car.<br />

• Always lock the car and keep the<br />

remote control out of reach of children.<br />

• Keep the rear seat backrests raised to<br />

prevent children from crawling into the<br />

luggage compartment from the cabin.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 28 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

28 Safety<br />

General information on child<br />

safety<br />

The safety of children in the car is just as<br />

important as that of adults.<br />

Children must use specially adapted safety<br />

equipment. The equipment must be<br />

adapted to the size of the child.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer before fitting a carrycot,<br />

child seat or booster cushion.<br />

Make sure you are acquainted with the<br />

legal requirements for seating children<br />

in the car.<br />

Specially adapted safety equipment should<br />

be used until the child is 140 cm tall.<br />

Child seats 3<br />

Child seats are available in different revisions<br />

to suit the child’s weight. See the table<br />

on page 30.<br />

The car seats available from authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> dealers are fitted using the car’s<br />

standard 3-point seat belt.<br />

Always follow the fitting instructions<br />

supplied with the child seat.<br />

Use a child seat approved for the weight<br />

of the child and suitable for its height,<br />

see page 30.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 29 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

29<br />

Rear seat - fitting a child seat<br />

The underside anchorage straps of a rearfacing<br />

3 child seat must be attached to the<br />

attachment points that are found under the<br />

driver and passenger seats (see illustration).<br />

For how to fit an ISOFIX seat, see page 32.<br />

Attach each underside anchorage straps to<br />

the nearest attachment eye.<br />

Anchorage eyes for underside child seat<br />

anchorage straps.<br />

Example of child seat positions in the<br />

rear seat.<br />

The child seat illustrated is just an<br />

example. Some child seats have a<br />

different appearance.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 30 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

30 Safety<br />

Weight<br />

(age)<br />

Height<br />

Up to 10 kg<br />

(up to approx.<br />

9months)<br />

Up to 13 kg<br />

(up to approx.<br />

2years)<br />

9 to 18 kg<br />

(approx. 9 months<br />

to 4 years)<br />

15–36 kg<br />

(approx.<br />

3–12 years)<br />

shorter than 140 cm<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> recommends<br />

that child seats 3 be placed in the rear seat of the car.<br />

The various seats are approved as follows:<br />

Front<br />

passenger seat<br />

X: children shorter than 140 cm are not allowed to sit here.<br />

U: Universally approved seat.<br />

L: see next page for recommended child seats.<br />

How long a child seat may be used is not just<br />

determined by the weight of the child but<br />

also by its height.<br />

Outer rear<br />

seat<br />

Centre rear<br />

seat<br />

X U L<br />

X U L<br />

X U L<br />

X U L


460_OM_MY09.book Page 31 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

31<br />

Weight<br />

(age)<br />

Height<br />

Up to 10 kg<br />

(up to approx.<br />

9months)<br />

Up to 13 kg<br />

(up to approx. 2 years)<br />

9 to 18 kg<br />

(approx. 9 months<br />

to 4 years)<br />

15 to 25 kg<br />

(approx.<br />

3 to 6 years)<br />

15–36 kg<br />

(approx.<br />

3–12 years)<br />

shorter than 140 cm<br />

15–36 kg<br />

(3–12 years)<br />

shorter than 140 cm<br />

Child seats 3, approved as per ECE R44.03<br />

Child Seat<br />

with infant insert<br />

Child Seat<br />

with infant insert<br />

Child Seat<br />

Child Seat<br />

Belt Seat<br />

Booster Cushion


460_OM_MY09.book Page 32 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

32 Safety<br />

ISOFIX<br />

To facilitate fitting a child seat, your car has<br />

ISOFIX attachment points. ISOFIX is a car<br />

industry standard for the fitting of child<br />

seats. There are ISOFIX attachment points<br />

in the outer rear seats.<br />

The attachments consist of two anchorages<br />

for each child seat. They are only to be<br />

used together with special child seats. The<br />

attachment points are located between the<br />

seat cushion and backrest. There is a mark<br />

above each attachment point to make it<br />

easier to find.<br />

Fitting an ISOFIX child seat<br />

1 Place the child seat on the seat cushion.<br />

2 Slide the attachments on the child seat<br />

in between the seat cushion and backrest.<br />

3 Press the attachments on the child seat<br />

down onto the seat.<br />

4 Press the child seat in towards the<br />

attachment points to lock it in position.<br />

5 Pull the child seat to check that it is<br />

securely positioned and that both<br />

attachment points on the child seat are<br />

securely engaged with the ISOFIX<br />

brackets.<br />

The illustration shows ISOFIX attachment points. The centre head restraint is an option.<br />

Only use the belt supplied with the ISOFIX<br />

seat.<br />

Always follow the installation instructions<br />

supplied with the ISOFIX seat.<br />

The availability of child seats designed for<br />

the ISOFIX system can be limited.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 33 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

33<br />

Top tether<br />

(Australia only)<br />

WARNING<br />

Child restraint anchorages are designed<br />

to withstand only those loads imposed by<br />

correctly fitted child restraints.<br />

Under no circumstances are they to be<br />

used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for<br />

attaching other items or equipment to the<br />

vehicle.<br />

If a cargo net is fitted, do not pull the top<br />

tether strap through the cargo net in such<br />

a way that there is slack in the strap to the<br />

child seat.<br />

Child restraints with a tether must be<br />

anchored according to Australian law.<br />

If you have any questions regarding child<br />

anchorages we recommend that you consult<br />

your <strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer.<br />

The car is provided with three top tether<br />

anchorages. Use the one that is right behind<br />

the child restraint and attach the restraint as<br />

follows:<br />

1 Place the child restraint in the rear seat.<br />

2 Secure the lower part of the child<br />

restraint by means of the lower anchorages<br />

(ISOFIX) or the seat belts as<br />

described in the child restraint installation<br />

instruction.<br />

Child restraint anchorages<br />

3 Lower the headrest and route the tether<br />

over it.<br />

4 Attach the tether to the anchorage.<br />

If the anchorage is not visible then<br />

release (see page 110) and fold the rear<br />

seat backrest forward enough to reach<br />

and fold up the anchorage in question.<br />

5 Tighten the tether so that the back of the<br />

child restraint is pressed hard against<br />

the backrest.<br />

6 Pull the child restraint to make a second<br />

check that the restraint is securely<br />

attached at both the lower anchorages<br />

bars or the safety belts and the top tether<br />

strap.<br />

Lower anchor (ISOFIX) and top tether<br />

anchor locations


460_OM_MY09.book Page 34 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

34 Safety<br />

Airbag<br />

WARNING<br />

To reduce risk of injury:<br />

• Always wear your seat belt.<br />

• Always adjust your seat so that you<br />

are as far back as possible but still<br />

able to operate the pedals and reach<br />

the steering wheel and controls comfortably.<br />

• Children shorter than 140 cm must<br />

always travel in the rear seat as the<br />

car has a passenger airbag.<br />

• Never place a child seat in the front<br />

passenger seat.<br />

Airbag system components<br />

• Airbag in steering wheel.<br />

• Airbag in front of front passenger seat.<br />

• Side airbag in side of front seat backrests.<br />

• Inflatable curtain along long sides of<br />

headlining (between front and rear roof<br />

pillars).<br />

• Seat belt pretensioner for the two front<br />

seats.<br />

The airbag system supplements the protection<br />

provided by the seat belts to further<br />

enhance the safety of occupants taller than<br />

140 cm.<br />

When the system is activated at the moment<br />

of a frontal impact, the airbag inflates and<br />

then deflates through holes in the back. The<br />

whole operation takes roughly 0.1 second,<br />

quicker than the blink of an eye.<br />

The driver and passenger airbags are socalled<br />

smart airbags. This means that the<br />

system compensates for factors such as the<br />

force of the collision.<br />

When the airbag system is activated all of<br />

the doors are unlocked while the interior/<br />

exterior lighting and the hazard warning<br />

lights are illuminated at the same time.<br />

Note:<br />

The sensor reacts differently depending<br />

on whether or not the front seat belts on the<br />

driver’s and passenger sides are used.<br />

Situations can therefore arise where only<br />

one of the airbags inflates. It is also possible<br />

for only the seat belt pretensioners to be<br />

activated and for the airbags to remain uninflated.<br />

If only Stage I is activated at the moment<br />

of impact, Stage II will automatically be activated<br />

later to neutralise the gas generator in<br />

the airbag.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 35 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

35<br />

If the impact sensors register forces corresponding<br />

to a high speed collision (airbag<br />

stage II activated), the inflatable curtains will<br />

also be triggered. See page 40.<br />

If a fault arises in the airbag system during<br />

a journey, the airbag warning lamp on the<br />

main instrument panel will come on and the<br />

DIC will display:<br />

Airbag malfunction.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Inflated airbag (driver’s side).<br />

Inflation and deflation of airbag takes<br />

approx. 0.1 s.<br />

Both front airbags inflated<br />

The driver airbag and passenger airbag are<br />

triggered by violent front-end collisions.<br />

They will not be activated by minor front-end<br />

impacts, if the car overturns or by rear-end<br />

and side-on impacts.<br />

Two impact sensors are located on the top<br />

of the front bumper under the painted shell.<br />

These sensors register any vehicle impact<br />

at an extremely early stage. Based on this<br />

information and the central sensor in the<br />

control module, the control module determines<br />

whether airbag deployment is<br />

required. The control module also determines<br />

whether other airbag system components<br />

should be deployed: seat belt pretensioners,<br />

inflatable curtains.<br />

Which airbag system components are<br />

deployed depends on a number of factors,<br />

such as the force of the collision and the<br />

angle of impact.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 36 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

36 Safety<br />

Airbag system<br />

1 Steering wheel with integral airbag<br />

2 Passenger airbag<br />

3 Side airbags<br />

4 Inflatable curtain<br />

5 Front sensor, in front bumper<br />

6 Side impact sensor<br />

7 Side impact sensor<br />

8 Electronic control module with central sensor<br />

Accessories and other equipment must<br />

not be fitted to the surfaces marked as<br />

these are where the airbags inflate in the<br />

event of a collision


460_OM_MY09.book Page 37 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

37<br />

WARNING<br />

• All car occupants must always wear a<br />

seat belt, even if the car is equipped<br />

with airbags.<br />

• Note that because the airbag inflates<br />

and deflates extremely quickly, it will<br />

not provide protection against a<br />

second impact occurring in the same<br />

incident. Always wear your seat belt.<br />

• The gas that fills the airbag on inflation<br />

is hot. In some circumstances, this gas<br />

can cause minor burns to the arms<br />

when the airbag deflates.<br />

• Fumes are generated by the chemical<br />

reaction that inflates the airbag.<br />

Skin surfaces that show signs of irritation<br />

should be washed with clean<br />

water and a mild soap as soon as possible.<br />

In the event of eye irritation, flush the<br />

eyes thoroughly with clean water for at<br />

least 20 minutes.<br />

In case of persistent irritation, consult<br />

a doctor.<br />

• Never attach anything to the steering<br />

wheel, fascia or roof pillars as this<br />

could cause personal injury when an<br />

airbag inflates. The same applies to<br />

anything you might have in your<br />

mouth, such as a pipe.<br />

• Never rest your hands or forearms on<br />

the steering wheel where the airbag is<br />

fitted.<br />

• If the airbag lamp in the main<br />

instrument panel does not go out after<br />

start or illuminates or flashing while<br />

driving, the car must be checked<br />

immediately by a workshop. We recommend<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If the airbag lamp is illuminated,<br />

the system may fail to deploy in the<br />

event of a collision or could deploy<br />

unintentionally.<br />

• Always keep the whole of your back in<br />

contact with the backrest, and your<br />

seat positioned as far back as is practical.<br />

Otherwise you will be thrown<br />

back against the backrest when the<br />

airbag inflates which could cause you<br />

injury or death. The airbag needs<br />

room in which to inflate.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 38 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

38 Safety<br />

Operation of the steering wheel airbag in<br />

a front-end collision<br />

Moment of impact.<br />

Sensors detect a<br />

retardation and send a<br />

signal via the control<br />

module to a gas generator<br />

that inflates the<br />

airbag.<br />

The inflating airbag<br />

cushions the driver.<br />

Airbag now fully<br />

inflated.<br />

The airbag begins to<br />

deflate.<br />

Front passenger seat<br />

The system is the same as that used on the<br />

driver’s side.<br />

The airbag systems are interconnected and<br />

have a common warning lamp. The passenger<br />

airbag is housed in the fascia above<br />

the glove compartment and is marked<br />

"AIRBAG".<br />

In the event of a frontal collision both airbags<br />

are activated even if the passenger<br />

seat is unoccupied.<br />

WARNING<br />

• NEVER fit a child seat in<br />

front of the passenger<br />

AIRBAG.<br />

• DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can<br />

occur.<br />

• Children shorter than 140 cm must<br />

never sit in front of an airbag.<br />

• Never let a child stand in front of the<br />

front passenger seat or sit on the passenger’s<br />

knee due to the risk of<br />

serious injury or death to the child by<br />

the airbag in the event of a collision.<br />

• Always keep the door of the glove<br />

compartment shut while the car is<br />

moving. An open glove compartment<br />

could cause personal injury in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Keep your feet on the floor - never put<br />

feet up on the fascia, on the seat or out<br />

of the window.<br />

• Do not carry anything in your lap.<br />

• Never place anything on the fascia or<br />

in front of the seat as, in addition to<br />

being a hazard to passengers, this<br />

could interfere with the function of the<br />

airbag in the event of a collision. Never<br />

mount accessories on the fascia.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 39 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

39<br />

Head protection<br />

Pillar trim and the headlining are designed<br />

to absorb energy from a head impact. After<br />

a collision, parts located where a passenger<br />

was sitting must be replaced. Retrofitting of<br />

other parts on pillar trim and the headlining<br />

is prohibited as this could hinder deployment<br />

of the inflatable curtain.<br />

Side-impact protection<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never fit seat covers. Seat covers can<br />

prevent the side airbags from inflating<br />

correctly and providing the intended<br />

extra protection.<br />

• Do not place any objects in the area<br />

that would be filled by an inflated side<br />

airbag.<br />

• For optimum protection, sit upright<br />

with the seat belt correctly fastened.<br />

• The side impact protection is only<br />

deployed in the event of a side-on collision,<br />

not by a rear-end collision or if<br />

the car rolls over.<br />

• Damage or wear to the upholstery or<br />

seams of the seat in the area near the<br />

side airbag must be immediately rectified.<br />

We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The front seat side airbags protect the upper<br />

body and are integrated in the outside of the<br />

front seat backrests. The inflatable curtain is<br />

a component of the side impact protection<br />

system. See page 40.<br />

The side airbags are designed to inflate only<br />

under certain conditions caused by a sideon<br />

collision. Inflation depends on such factors<br />

as the force and angle of the impact, the<br />

speed of the car on impact, and the point on<br />

the side of the car at which the impact<br />

occurs.<br />

There are two sensors on each side of the<br />

car: one at the rear of each front door sill and<br />

one in the lower part of each C-pillar. The<br />

side-impact protection is only activated on<br />

the side of impact, while the seat belt pretensioners<br />

on both sides are deployed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 40 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

40 Safety<br />

• Do not position a sun visor or similar in<br />

the area that would be filled by the<br />

inflatable curtain.<br />

• Do not attach anything to the car’s<br />

headlining, roof pillars or side panels<br />

as this could prevent the side-impact<br />

protection from providing the intended<br />

protection.<br />

Deployed side airbag and inflatable<br />

curtain<br />

Inflatable curtain 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Do not sit with your head rested<br />

against the side window. The inflatable<br />

curtain is designed to inflate<br />

between the window and the head.<br />

Resting the head against the window<br />

could prevent the inflatable curtain<br />

from providing the intended protection.<br />

• Hang only light clothes from the hooks<br />

on the rear seat courtesy handles. The<br />

items of clothing must not contain<br />

heavy or sharp objects. Do not use<br />

coat hangers.<br />

• Do not stack loads so high that they<br />

could encumber the inflatable curtain<br />

in the event of a collision.<br />

The inflatable curtains, which protect the<br />

head, are concealed along the lengths of<br />

the headlining (all the way between front<br />

and rear roof pillars).<br />

The inflatable curtains inflate at the same<br />

time as the side airbags in the front seats in<br />

case of a side-on impact.<br />

The inflatable curtains reduce the risk of<br />

head injuries to the occupants of the car’s<br />

outer seats. The inflatable curtains cover<br />

the area between the front and rear roof pillars.<br />

If the airbag system registers forces equivalent<br />

to a high-speed frontal collision<br />

(Stage II for the steering wheel and passenger<br />

airbags), the inflatable curtains will<br />

also be detonated.<br />

Deployed inflatable curtain


460_OM_MY09.book Page 41 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

41<br />

Prohibited seating position<br />

For optimal protection, do not sit too close to<br />

the door. Bear this in mind, for example, if<br />

someone is sleeping in the car. The inflatable<br />

curtain comes down from the headlining<br />

and covers a large portion of the side<br />

windows down to the door trim.<br />

Airbag warning lamp<br />

WARNING<br />

If the airbag warning lamp in the main<br />

instrument panel does not extinguish<br />

after the car has been started, or comes<br />

on while driving, this indicates that the<br />

function of the airbag system cannot be<br />

guaranteed. The car must be checked<br />

immediately. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

See page 65.<br />

Servicing the airbag system<br />

The system should be checked as prescribed<br />

by the service programme. In other<br />

respects, the system is maintenance-free.<br />

Work on and scrapping of<br />

airbags and seat belt<br />

pretensioners<br />

WARNING<br />

• Under no circumstances may any<br />

modifications be made that affect the<br />

steering wheel or the airbag’s electrical<br />

circuitry.<br />

• During any welding, both battery<br />

cables must be disconnected and covered<br />

over.<br />

• Before quick drying paint in the vicinity<br />

of the electronic control module, the<br />

module’s grounding points and wiring<br />

must be covered.<br />

• Airbags and seat belt pretensioners<br />

must be detonated under controlled<br />

conditions before the car is scrapped<br />

or any of the system’s components are<br />

removed. Airbags or seat belt pretensioners<br />

that have been detonated in a<br />

collision must be replaced by new<br />

ones.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 42 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

42 Safety<br />

• The car’s impact protection consists of<br />

various safety items, such as airbags,<br />

seat belts, steering wheel, seats and<br />

instrument panel. These items are<br />

harmonised to provide excellent protection<br />

in the event of a collision.<br />

Therefore, never transfer an airbag<br />

from one car to another.<br />

There is no guarantee that a transferred<br />

airbag will function optimally in<br />

the event of a collision.<br />

• Work on the car that requires the<br />

replacing or scrapping of an airbag or<br />

seat belt pretensioner must be carried<br />

out at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Frequently asked questions<br />

about airbags<br />

Do you still need to wear a seat belt if the car<br />

has airbags?<br />

Yes, always! Airbags merely supplement<br />

the car’s normal safety system. Moreover,<br />

an airbag will only be actuated in a serious<br />

front-end or side-on collision, which means,<br />

of course, that it provides no protection in<br />

minor frontal or side-on collisions, in rearend<br />

collisions or if the car rolls over.<br />

Seat belts can prevent passengers from<br />

being thrown around or out of the car and<br />

being seriously or fatally injured.<br />

But they also ensure, in a collision in which<br />

the airbags are detonated, that the airbag<br />

will make optimum contact with the occupant,<br />

i.e. square on from the front. If the<br />

occupant meets the airbag at an offset, the<br />

protection afforded will be diminished.<br />

In addition, airbags provide no protection<br />

against a secondary impact occurring in the<br />

same incident. Therefore, wear a seat belt<br />

at all times.<br />

Don’t sit too close to the airbag; it needs<br />

room to inflate.<br />

The airbag inflates very quickly and powerfully<br />

in order to protect an adult person,<br />

before their head is thrown forward, in a<br />

violent front-end collision.<br />

When are the driver and passenger airbags<br />

detonated?<br />

The airbags will only be detonated under<br />

certain predetermined conditions in a violent<br />

front-end collision, depending on such<br />

factors as the force and angle of the impact,<br />

the speed of the car on impact, and the<br />

resistance to deformation of the impacting<br />

object.<br />

The airbag system can only be activated<br />

once in the same incident.<br />

Do not attempt to drive the car after an<br />

airbag has been detonated, even if this is<br />

possible.<br />

What won’t trigger the airbag?<br />

The airbag system will not be activated in all<br />

front-end collisions. For instance, if the car<br />

has hit something relatively soft and yielding<br />

(e.g. a snow drift or a hedge) or a solid<br />

object at a low speed, the airbag system will<br />

not necessarily be triggered.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 43 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Safety<br />

43<br />

How loud is the detonation?<br />

There is a short-lived, loud noise on detonation<br />

but it will not damage your hearing. For<br />

a short time afterwards you could experience<br />

a buzzing or ringing noise in your ears.<br />

Most people who have experienced this do<br />

not remember the noise of the detonation -<br />

only the noise of the collision itself.<br />

Can I have a child seat in the front seat if the<br />

car has a passenger airbag?<br />

Definitely not! The force and speed with<br />

which the airbag inflates would propel the<br />

child seat violently backwards, which could<br />

cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.<br />

What should I do if the airbag warning light<br />

comes on?<br />

The airbag system’s diagnostics function<br />

has detected a fault. Proper function of the<br />

system cannot be guaranteed and the<br />

system could be activated erroneously. Visit<br />

a workshop immediately. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

Are the dust and fumes given off when the<br />

airbag operates at all harmful?<br />

Most people who have remained in a car<br />

with little or no ventilation for several minutes<br />

normally only suffer mild throat or eye<br />

irritation. Try, if possible, not to get dust on<br />

your skin as it can cause irritation.<br />

In case of persistent irritation, consult a<br />

doctor.<br />

If you suffer from asthma, the incident may<br />

bring on an attack, in which case you should<br />

follow the normal procedure advised by<br />

your doctor. It is advisable to consult a<br />

doctor afterwards.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 44 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

44 Safety<br />

(This page has been left blank.)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 45 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

45<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

Doors ________________ 46<br />

Locks ________________ 46<br />

Car alarm 3 ___________ 54<br />

Opening the fuel filler<br />

flap manually 3_______ 60<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 46 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

46 Locks and car alarm<br />

Doors<br />

Open the door by lifting the door handle.<br />

The following message appears on the DIC<br />

if a door is not closed (text displayed first<br />

when vehicle speed exceeds 25 km/h and<br />

the door has still not been closed):<br />

Close doors.<br />

Locks<br />

WARNING<br />

Having the doors locked while on the road<br />

will reduce the likelihood of:<br />

• children, in particular, opening doors<br />

and falling out of the car<br />

• intruders entering the car when it is<br />

moving slowly or at a standstill.<br />

However, it must also be remembered<br />

that locked doors can hamper rescuers<br />

in the event of a collision.<br />

Remote control<br />

The remote control and ignition key are<br />

integrated in one unit, and referred to in this<br />

manual as the remote control.<br />

The remote control contains a mechanical<br />

key, referred to in this manual as the traditional<br />

key. This traditional key can be used<br />

in an emergency to lock or unlock the<br />

driver’s door from outside, see page 49.<br />

This key does not fit the ignition switch.<br />

A key code number is supplied with your<br />

car. This number needs to be quoted for<br />

ordering a new traditional key (contained<br />

in the remote control). Therefore, keep this<br />

number in a safe place.<br />

The remote control contains an electronic<br />

code that is unique to your car. When the<br />

remote control is inserted into the ignition<br />

switch, this code is checked. If the code is<br />

incorrect, the car will not start.<br />

The car is supplied with two remote controls.<br />

It is possible to have up to five remote<br />

controls programmed for the car at any one<br />

time. If one is lost, a replacement should be<br />

obtained as soon as possible. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. When a new remote<br />

control is programmed into the car, the lost<br />

one will be deprogrammed automatically.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 47 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

47<br />

Note:<br />

If a new remote control has to be ordered<br />

and programmed, at least one old one is<br />

required for the locking system’s electronic<br />

unit to recognise the new (ordered) remote<br />

control. Once the new remote control has<br />

been programmed, the old unit that is lost<br />

will not work. Therefore, you should carry<br />

two remote controls separately, especially<br />

on long journeys.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The remote control contains delicate<br />

electronics.<br />

• Do not expose it to water.<br />

• Avoid rough handling.<br />

• Do not place the remote control where<br />

it may be subjected to high temperatures,<br />

such as on the fascia.<br />

• Warm the remote control in your<br />

hands for a couple of minutes if it has<br />

become very cold to prevent malfunction.<br />

• For details on changing the battery,<br />

refer to page 52.<br />

Remote control<br />

1 Lock.<br />

2 Unlocks car and turns on cabin lighting.<br />

3 Opens boot lid.<br />

Checks number of remote controls, see<br />

page 52.<br />

4 Turns on exterior and cabin lighting.<br />

Activates panic function (cars with car alarm).<br />

Remote control functions<br />

Button Pressed once Press and hold<br />

button 2 s<br />

Locks all doors, fuel filler<br />

flap and boot lid. Doors<br />

cannot be opened from<br />

inside.<br />

Unlocks all doors, fuel filler<br />

flap and boot lid.<br />

Opens boot lid.<br />

Checks number of remote<br />

controls, see page 52.<br />

Turns on exterior and cabin<br />

lighting *) for 30 s or turns<br />

off exterior and cabin<br />

lighting.<br />

Deactivates panic alarm.<br />

Comfort closing,<br />

see page 98.<br />

Comfort opening,<br />

see page 97.<br />

*) position lights, side direction indicators, tail<br />

lights and number plate lighting<br />

The panic function is only available on cars<br />

fitted with a car alarm (option for cars<br />

without car alarm, we recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop),<br />

see page 57.<br />

_<br />

Cars with car<br />

alarm: Panic<br />

alarm (activates<br />

alarm manually).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 48 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

48 Locks and car alarm<br />

Locking/unlocking the car<br />

Remote locking and unlocking also control<br />

the car alarm (if fitted).<br />

Locked doors cannot be opened from inside<br />

the car.<br />

Remote locking<br />

WARNING<br />

None of the car doors can be opened from<br />

the inside when the car is locked. The car<br />

is TSL locked 3 (Theft Security Lock).<br />

Never lock anyone in the car.<br />

Press the button once – locks all<br />

doors and the boot lid and activates TSL.<br />

The hazard warning lights will flash once<br />

to confirm.<br />

In order for TSL to be activated, all doors<br />

and the boot lid must be closed when the<br />

car is locked. Otherwise, the car is locked<br />

without the TSL function.<br />

TSL locking 3<br />

(Theft Security Lock)<br />

TSL locking means that the doors can<br />

only be unlocked with the remote control.<br />

The front left door can be unlocked with<br />

the traditional key. See page 49.<br />

If you are seated in the car and TSL is<br />

active, TSL will be deactivated if you insert<br />

the remote control into the ignition switch.<br />

The car will remain locked.<br />

If you wish to lock the car without activating<br />

TSL, hold a passenger door open and lock<br />

the car with the remote control. Then close<br />

the door.<br />

Remote unlocking<br />

Pressing the button once – unlocks all<br />

doors, the fuel filler flap and the boot lid.<br />

The hazard warning lights will flash twice<br />

to confirm.<br />

If remote unlocking should fail to work,<br />

see page 49.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 49 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

49<br />

Intermittent malfunctioning<br />

Equipment in the vicinity of the car that uses<br />

the same frequency as the remote control<br />

may cause interference to the remote control<br />

signal. In this case, retry from another<br />

angle and aim at the receiver located by<br />

the steering wheel.<br />

If remote unlocking should fail to work<br />

1 Remove the traditional key from the<br />

remote control by pressing the emblem<br />

on the reverse of the remote control.<br />

(This key only fits the front left-hand<br />

door.)<br />

2 Unlock the door with the key.<br />

Note:<br />

If the car is equipped with a car alarm, this<br />

will be triggered. Silence the alarm by<br />

inserting the remote control in the ignition<br />

switch and turning it to the position 3.<br />

Locking/unlocking the front left-hand door<br />

with the traditional key<br />

1 Lock<br />

2 Unlock


460_OM_MY09.book Page 50 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

50 Locks and car alarm<br />

Locking a car with flat battery<br />

The steering wheel lock requires sufficient<br />

battery voltage to lock and unlock. If the<br />

battery voltage drops below a certain level<br />

while the remote control is in the ignition<br />

switch, you will not be able to remove the<br />

remote control.<br />

If you must leave the car, proceed as<br />

follows:<br />

Lock the car by pressing down the lock<br />

buttons on the doors. Lock the front left<br />

door from outside with the traditional key,<br />

see page 49. The car is now locked. If the<br />

car has a car alarm, this will remain inactive.<br />

Boot lid<br />

The boot lid is unlocked along with the<br />

car doors.<br />

Open the boot lid with the handle above<br />

the number plate.<br />

Sedan: The boot lid can also be unlocked<br />

and opened via button on the remote<br />

control.<br />

Wagon: The boot lid can also be unlocked<br />

and opened via button on the remote<br />

control.<br />

Cars with car alarm<br />

The movement sensor and tilt sensor in<br />

the cabin are now disabled.<br />

Note:<br />

The boot lid is unlocked when it is closed.<br />

Lock it by pressing button on the<br />

remote control. If the car has an alarm, it will<br />

now be armed.<br />

Central locking switch<br />

Switch on driver’s door<br />

The central locking can also be operated<br />

from inside the car using the switch by the<br />

driver’s door handle.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 51 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

51<br />

• Locking the car with the remote control<br />

renders this switch inoperative.<br />

• If you are inside the car and lock the car<br />

with the remote control, TSL will be activated.<br />

This means that the switch on the<br />

driver’s door will be rendered inoperative<br />

and the car must be unlocked with the<br />

remote control. TSL will be deactivated if<br />

you insert the remote control into the ignition<br />

switch, returning the power supply to<br />

the driver’s door switch. The doors cannot<br />

however be opened from outside the car.<br />

If the car is left with one or more doors open,<br />

the interior lighting will be switched off automatically<br />

after 20 minutes. This is to prevent<br />

the battery from running flat. Also, if the car<br />

has electrically adjustable seats, these will<br />

cease to operate.<br />

Child safety locks<br />

The rear doors are equipped with child<br />

safety locks that are operated by means<br />

of a catch adjacent to the door lock.<br />

Insert a screwdriver or the traditional key<br />

(in the remote control) and turn 45°.<br />

When the child safety lock is in the locked<br />

position, the door can only be opened from<br />

outside the car.<br />

Child safety locks


460_OM_MY09.book Page 52 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

52 Locks and car alarm<br />

Reprogramming lock system<br />

functions<br />

Certain lock system functions can be reprogrammed.<br />

We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop, see<br />

page 248.<br />

Checking the number of remote<br />

controls<br />

To check the number of remote controls that<br />

are programmed for the car:<br />

1 Insert the remote control into the ignition<br />

switch and turn it to position 3.<br />

2 Press and hold the button for more<br />

than 2 seconds within 30 seconds of<br />

turning the ignition switch to position 3.<br />

3 The DIC will now display the number of<br />

remote controls that are programmed for<br />

your car, and which of these (1–5) is in<br />

the ignition switch.<br />

Example of DIC message:<br />

Number of keys:<br />

Active key number:<br />

Changing the battery<br />

WARNING<br />

Keep the battery and other small components<br />

of the remote control out of reach of<br />

children.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The electronics of the remote control are<br />

sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Incorrect<br />

handling when changing the battery<br />

can damage the remote control. Avoid<br />

touching electronic components of the<br />

remote control with your hands.<br />

When the voltage of the remote control battery<br />

drops below a certain level, the DIC will<br />

display:<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

Change the battery as soon as possible to<br />

avoid malfunctioning.<br />

Battery: For optimum performance in all<br />

temperatures and good service life, we<br />

recommend the use of a Sony or Panasonic<br />

CR2032, 3V lithium battery.<br />

The battery should last for about 4 years of<br />

normal use.<br />

The battery type is marked on the inside of<br />

the remote control. Avoid leaving fingerprints<br />

on the faces of the battery.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 53 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

53<br />

Press the emblem to remove the<br />

traditional key.<br />

1 Press the emblem on the reverse of the<br />

remote control to remove the traditional<br />

key.<br />

2 Insert the tip of the key into the small<br />

hole and turn the key to split the remote<br />

control.<br />

3 Change the battery. Insert it in same way<br />

as the old battery, with the positive (+)<br />

side facing down.<br />

4 Fit and press together the two halves of<br />

the remote control until you hear several<br />

clicks. Avoid pressing the buttons. Reinsert<br />

the traditional key into the remote<br />

control.<br />

5 After changing the battery in the remote<br />

control, it is only possible to use the<br />

remote control a limited number of times<br />

before synchronisation with the car is<br />

lost. Therefore, do not press the buttons<br />

on the remote control repeatedly directly<br />

after changing the battery.<br />

Unlock the car and insert the remote<br />

control into the ignition switch to synchronise<br />

the remote control and car.<br />

If the central locking system does not work<br />

after changing the battery and the car is<br />

locked, proceed as follows:<br />

1 Unlock the front left door with the traditional<br />

key. If the car has a car alarm, this<br />

will be tripped.<br />

2 Open the door and insert the remote<br />

control into the ignition switch. If the car<br />

has a car alarm, this will be silenced.<br />

The remote control and receiver unit are<br />

now synchronised.<br />

Change the battery and fit together to two<br />

halves of the remote control


460_OM_MY09.book Page 54 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

54 Locks and car alarm<br />

Immobilizer<br />

The remote control contains an electronic<br />

code that is unique to your car. When the<br />

remote control is inserted into the ignition<br />

switch, this code is checked and the LED<br />

double-flashes for 3 seconds. If the code is<br />

correct, the car can be started.<br />

Each time you remove the remote control<br />

from the ignition, the electronic starting<br />

interlock is activated, the LED doubleflashes<br />

for 3 seconds and the car becomes<br />

immobilised. If an incorrect remote control is<br />

now inserted into the ignition switch (e.g. the<br />

remote control of another car), the immobilizer<br />

will remain operative (the LED will not<br />

double-flash for 3 seconds) and it will not be<br />

possible to start the car.<br />

If, when inserted into the ignition switch,<br />

there is a problem checking the electronic<br />

code of the remote control, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Key not accepted.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Visit an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop to<br />

have the problem checked and rectified.<br />

Car alarm 3<br />

The car alarm is available with or without a<br />

tilt sensor. Car alarms with a tilt sensor also<br />

have a separate siren. Car alarms without a<br />

tilt sensor use the car’s horn.<br />

WARNING<br />

Never leave a child or animal in the car. In<br />

sunny weather the temperature in the<br />

passenger and luggage compartments<br />

can climb to 70–80 °C.<br />

The car alarm is armed when the car is<br />

locked with the remote control.<br />

The car alarm will not be armed if you lock<br />

the car with the traditional key, see page 49.<br />

All the doors, the bonnet and the boot lid are<br />

monitored by the alarm. A movement<br />

sensor triggers the alarm if movement is<br />

detected in the cabin, such as if someone<br />

sticks in their arm through a smashed<br />

window.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 55 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

55<br />

All the windows should be shut when the<br />

alarm is armed. Otherwise, the movement<br />

sensor may interpret a passer-by as an<br />

attempted break-in.<br />

The alarm is armed 11 seconds after<br />

remote locking.<br />

During the delay period, the LED shines<br />

constantly. It will then start to flash once<br />

every 3 seconds. The LED is located on the<br />

fascia.<br />

If a door or the boot lid is open when the<br />

car is locked with the remote control,<br />

the LED will flash 3 times per second for<br />

11 seconds. Check that the doors, bonnet<br />

and boot lid are closed.<br />

If the signal persists, contact a workshop to<br />

have the problem checked and rectified. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Locking the boot lid<br />

If you unlock/open the boot lid from outside<br />

with button on the remote control, it will<br />

be unlocked when closed. Lock it by<br />

pressing button on the remote control.<br />

If the car has an alarm, it will be armed.<br />

To avoid any inconvenience, make sure that<br />

anyone using the car is familiar with how the<br />

car alarm and the locking system work.<br />

If the alarm has been triggered since the car<br />

was last locked, the DIC will display:<br />

Alarm tripped during<br />

last arming period.<br />

If the car alarm system malfunctions, the<br />

DIC will display:<br />

Theft protection failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Arming the car alarm<br />

The alarm is armed when all doors, the<br />

bonnet and the boot lid are closed and you<br />

lock the car with the remote control.<br />

What trips the alarm?<br />

The alarm will be tripped if:<br />

• A door, the bonnet or the boot lid is<br />

opened.<br />

• The movement sensor registers movement<br />

in the cabin.<br />

• The tilt sensor registers that the angle of<br />

the car has changed (if car alarm has tilt<br />

sensor).<br />

• Someone tampers with the alarm siren.<br />

• Somebody tries to hotwire the car.<br />

• The car battery is disconnected.<br />

Signals when the alarm is tripped<br />

If the alarm is triggered, the following alarm<br />

signals will be set off:<br />

• All direction indicators flash for 5 minutes.<br />

• The horn/siren sounds for 30-second<br />

intervals with 10-second breaks<br />

(max. 10 cycles).<br />

The signals can vary between markets<br />

and due to legal and insurance requirements.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 56 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

56 Locks and car alarm<br />

Switching off the alarm if tripped<br />

If the alarm has been triggered (direction<br />

indicators flashing and siren sounding) it<br />

can be turned off by pressing one of the<br />

buttons on the remote control or, if you are<br />

sitting in the car, by turning the ignition to<br />

position 3 (see below).<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Unlocks<br />

car.<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Car<br />

remains locked.<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Unlocks<br />

luggage compartment.<br />

Turns off lights and siren. Turns on<br />

exterior and cabin lighting. Car<br />

remains locked.<br />

If sitting in the car: Turn the remote<br />

control to position 3 in the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• The alarm can be disarmed and the<br />

car unlocked if you inadvertently press<br />

the unlocking button on the remote<br />

control while within range of the car.<br />

• If you lock the car in very severe cold,<br />

check that the doors lock properly.<br />

The lock buttons on the doors should<br />

all go down.<br />

Failing this, unlock and then lock the<br />

car again.<br />

Movement sensor 3<br />

The movement sensor monitors the cabin.<br />

The alarm will be triggered if a movement<br />

is detected, such as if someone sticks in<br />

their arm through a smashed window.<br />

Note:<br />

The movement sensor could also be<br />

triggered by an uninstalled cabin heater.<br />

To prevent a false alarm, switch off the<br />

movement sensor as described on page 57<br />

when the cabin heater is to be used.<br />

Tilt sensor 3<br />

The tilt sensor monitors the angle of the car.<br />

The tilt sensor will trigger the alarm if the<br />

angle of the car changes relative to its angle<br />

when it was locked, for example if it is raised<br />

with a jack.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 57 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

57<br />

Disabling the movement and tilt sensors<br />

If, for example, you leave a dog in the car,<br />

park on a ferry or use a cabin heater, you<br />

should disable the sensors as described<br />

below:<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Theft Alarm using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

5Select DOOR ONLY.<br />

6 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Theft Alarm 3<br />

FULL ALARM<br />

DOOR ONLY<br />

Movement and tilt sensors (if fitted) will be<br />

reactivated automatically the next time you<br />

start the car. You can activate the sensors<br />

manually as described above. Select FULL<br />

ALARM under Step 4 above.<br />

The functions of FULL ALARM and DOOR<br />

ONLY modes are explained below.<br />

FULL ALARM:<br />

The alarm will be triggered if a window<br />

is smashed and someone sticks in their<br />

arm to take something from the car. All<br />

windows and the sunroof should be<br />

shut when the car is locked in FULL<br />

ALARM mode.<br />

DOOR ONLY:<br />

In this mode, the movement and tilt<br />

sensors (if fitted) are disabled. This can<br />

be useful if you wish to leave a dog in<br />

the car or are travelling by ferry, for<br />

example.<br />

Panic function<br />

The alarm function also has a panic function.<br />

For cars without car alarm, we recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. The panic function<br />

makes it possible to trigger the alarm to<br />

attract attention or the like.<br />

The panic alarm can only be activated while<br />

the car is stationary. The alarm is silenced if<br />

the car is driven off.<br />

When the alarm is tripped, the lights and<br />

siren come on for 3 minutes or until you<br />

press one of the remote control buttons.<br />

To start the alarm manually proceed as<br />

follows:<br />

• Press and hold the button on the<br />

remote control for more than 2 seconds,<br />

or if you are sitting in the car...<br />

• Press and hold the or button on<br />

the driver’s door for more than 2 seconds.<br />

To switch off the alarm:<br />

• Press one of the remote control buttons<br />

or, if you are sitting in the car, the<br />

or button on the driver’s door.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 58 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

58 Locks and car alarm<br />

Overview of functions<br />

Locking/arming<br />

Unlocking/<br />

disarming<br />

Unlocking/<br />

disarming<br />

boot lid<br />

Alarm triggered<br />

Movement<br />

sensor<br />

Tilt sensor<br />

Direction indicators flash once.<br />

Hazard warning lights flash twice.<br />

Hazard warning lights flash three times.<br />

Direction indicators flash for 5 min.<br />

The siren sounds for 30-second intervals with<br />

10-second breaks (max. 10 cycles) or until you<br />

press one of the remote control buttons or turn<br />

the remote control to position 3 in the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

The movement sensor trips the alarm if it<br />

registers a movement in the cabin.<br />

The tilt sensor trips the alarm if the angle of the<br />

car changes relative to its angle when it was<br />

locked.<br />

Remote control<br />

Remote control<br />

battery<br />

Car battery<br />

Normal range: 5–15 metres.<br />

In favourable conditions the range can be<br />

significantly greater.<br />

During remote opening and closing of the<br />

windows/sunroof 3/soft top, the range is<br />

reduced by approximately half of normal range.<br />

Normal life: approx. 4 years.<br />

The battery should be changed when the<br />

following message appears on the DIC:<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

See Changing the battery, page 52.<br />

The alarm will trip if the battery is disconnected<br />

when the alarm is armed.<br />

Some car alarm functions and indications can be reprogrammed.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

for details of the possibilities. See also page 248.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 59 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Quick guide of LED signals and DIC messages<br />

Activity<br />

Arming (delay period)<br />

Alarm armed<br />

Disarming<br />

Alarm not armed<br />

A door, the bonnet or the tailgate<br />

is open or opened during the<br />

delay period.<br />

Car immobilised but not locked.<br />

Change of status of immobilizer<br />

system, valid key inserted or<br />

removed from ignition switch.<br />

LED signal<br />

Shines for 11 s<br />

Flashes once every 3 s<br />

Extinguishes<br />

Off<br />

Flashes for 11 s, then flashes<br />

once every 3 s<br />

Off<br />

Double-flashes for 3 s<br />

DIC message<br />

Key not accepted.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

Number of keys:<br />

Active key number:<br />

Alarm tripped during<br />

last arming period.<br />

Locks and car alarm<br />

Reason/action<br />

Error when remote control<br />

inserted into ignition switch.<br />

Battery needs replacing. See<br />

page 52.<br />

59<br />

Check of the number of remote<br />

controls programmed for your<br />

car. See page 52.<br />

The alarm has been tripped<br />

since the car was last locked.<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> & Corvette <strong>Europe</strong> hereby declares that the original equipment used<br />

in the remote control, door locks and alarm, as well as the decoding equipment<br />

of the immobilizer system, fulfils the basic requirements stipulated in<br />

R&TTE, Directive 1999/5/EC of the <strong>Europe</strong>an Parliament and of the Council<br />

of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal<br />

equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 60 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

60 Locks and car alarm<br />

Opening the fuel filler<br />

flap manually 3<br />

(Sedan only)<br />

If the fuel filler flap, which is controlled by the<br />

central locking system, does not unlock,<br />

proceed as described below.<br />

Check fuse 7 in the fuse panel at the end of<br />

the fascia, see page 206. If this fuse has<br />

blown or the new fuse blows, the fuel filler<br />

flap can be opened as follows:<br />

1 Open the hatch on the right-hand side of<br />

the luggage compartment. Unlock the<br />

plastic rivet by depressing the centre no<br />

more than 3 mm. Take hold of the collar<br />

of the rivet and pull it out. Refer also to<br />

page 198.<br />

2 Slacken the two screws (do not unscrew<br />

them fully). Lift up the screws and press<br />

them out of their keys.<br />

The fuel filler flap can now be opened as<br />

usual.<br />

Contact a workshop to have the fault remedied.<br />

We recommend that you contact a<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Opening the fuel filler flap manually


460_OM_MY09.book Page 61 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

61<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

Warning and indicator<br />

lights _______________ 62<br />

Instruments ___________ 69<br />

DIC (Driver Information<br />

Centre)______________ 71<br />

Switches _____________ 78<br />

Wipers and washers ____ 83<br />

Automatic climate<br />

control (ACC) 3 ______ 87<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 62 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

62 Instruments and controls<br />

Main instrument panel<br />

Warning and indicator<br />

lights<br />

The warnings and indications that can be<br />

shown depend on the engine variant and<br />

equipment level.<br />

Main instrument panel<br />

1 Rev counter<br />

2 Speedometer<br />

3 Fuel gauge<br />

4 Engine temperature gauge<br />

5 Information window, DIC<br />

6 Trip meter reset button<br />

ABS brakes warning light<br />

This warning light illuminates when a fault<br />

arises in the anti-lock brake system.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Antilock brake malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

The brake system will continue to function<br />

but without ABS modulation.<br />

Charging warning light<br />

This light comes on when the battery is not<br />

being charged by the alternator. If the light<br />

come on during driving, stop as soon as<br />

possible and switch off the engine.<br />

Check the drive belt, see page 188.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 63 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

63<br />

The light comes on if engine oil pressure is<br />

too low.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

If the indicator light flashes or illuminates<br />

while driving, stop immediately somewhere<br />

that does not impede traffic, switch off the<br />

engine and check the oil level. See<br />

page 180.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Oil pressure warning light<br />

(engine oil)<br />

Oil pressure low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Never drive the car when the oil pressure<br />

warning lamp is on. Low oil pressure can<br />

cause serious engine damage.<br />

Engine malfunction<br />

(CHECK ENGINE)<br />

WARNING<br />

The CHECK ENGINE light indicates that<br />

there is an engine-related problem.<br />

Even if the car can be driven while the<br />

CHECK ENGINE light is illuminated,<br />

have it checked as soon as possible.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If the fault is not rectified, more serious<br />

faults may arise affecting driveability.<br />

If driveability is affected the driver must<br />

be prepared to act (e.g. brake smoothly,<br />

engage neutral, stop in a suitable place,<br />

switch off the engine, etc.).<br />

The light illuminates to indicate a fault in the<br />

fuel or ignition system.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Reduced engine power.<br />

Contact service.<br />

The car can be driven with care, but engine<br />

performance will be limited. See page 129.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The car should be checked immediately<br />

to avoid serious faults. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

Main beam indicator light<br />

This light shows when the headlights are on<br />

main beam, see page 78.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 64 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

64 Instruments and controls<br />

Front fog lights 3<br />

This light indicates when the front fog lights<br />

are on, see page 81.<br />

Rear fog light indicator<br />

This lamp indicates when the rear fog light<br />

is on, see page 80.<br />

The rear fog light is switched off automatically<br />

when the engine is switched off. When<br />

the fog light is next needed, it will have to be<br />

switched on again manually.<br />

Brake warning light<br />

This warning lamp indicates when the brake<br />

fluid level is too low, see page 184.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Brake fluid level low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never drive the car when this light is<br />

illuminated - risk of brake failure.<br />

• If the level of brake fluid in the reservoir<br />

is below the MIN mark, the vehicle<br />

should be transported on a recovery<br />

vehicle.<br />

• Have the brake system checked<br />

immediately. We recommend that<br />

you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

For safety reasons, stop the car and check<br />

the level of the brake fluid, see page 184.<br />

If the level is normal, depress the brake<br />

pedal firmly two or three times. Now check<br />

the level again. If the level is still normal, you<br />

may drive the car with considerable caution<br />

to the nearest workshop to have the brake<br />

system checked. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The brake system provides Electronic<br />

Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes<br />

the brake pressure between the front<br />

and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve<br />

optimum braking performance irrespective<br />

of the car’s load.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 65 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

65<br />

Lights , and illuminate in the<br />

event of a fault in the EBD function.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Brake malfunction.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

If this occurs, drive carefully and contact<br />

a workshop as soon as possible. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. Refer to Brake warning<br />

light on page 64, ABS brakes warning<br />

light on page 62 and TCS OFF or<br />

StabiliTrak ® OFF 3 indicator light on<br />

page 67.<br />

Seat belt reminder<br />

This light reminds the driver to buckle up.<br />

Handbrake warning light<br />

This light shines when the handbrake is<br />

applied, see page 153.<br />

The handbrake is mechanical and operates<br />

on the rear wheels.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always apply the handbrake on<br />

parking.<br />

• Always apply the handbrake before<br />

removing the remote control.<br />

• Do not apply the handbrake while the<br />

car is moving, see page 153.<br />

If the parking brake is engaged when the car<br />

starts off, the parking brake symbol in the<br />

main instrument panel illuminates and the<br />

following message appears in DIC:<br />

Release park brake.<br />

Airbag warning light<br />

This light comes on when a fault is detected<br />

in the airbag system.<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

Airbag malfunction.<br />

Contact service.<br />

WARNING<br />

• If a fault is indicated, the correct function<br />

of the airbag system cannot be<br />

guaranteed.<br />

• Have the system checked immediately<br />

at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The light comes on for approx. 4 seconds<br />

when the ignition is turned to the start or<br />

drive position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 66 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

66 Instruments and controls<br />

The light comes on when there is less than<br />

approx. 10 litres of fuel in the tank. See also<br />

DTE function (Distance to Empty) on<br />

page 72.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Fuel-low indicator light<br />

If the car runs out of fuel, air may be drawn<br />

in with the fuel, which, in turn, can cause<br />

the catalytic converter to be damaged by<br />

overheating.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: If you run out of<br />

fuel, see page 136.<br />

Headlight and position<br />

light indicator<br />

This light indicates that the headlights or<br />

position lights are on.<br />

Cruise control indicator<br />

light 3<br />

This light comes on when the system is<br />

engaged, see page 144.<br />

Gear selector indicator<br />

(cars with automatic<br />

transmission)<br />

The selected gear position is displayed in<br />

the left-hand section of the information window.<br />

When gears are selected manually, the<br />

letter M (manual) and the selected gear are<br />

displayed, see page 143.<br />

TCS or StabiliTrak ®<br />

indicator light 3<br />

WARNING<br />

The system improves ride comfort and<br />

safety during normal driving. It must<br />

however not be regarded as a system<br />

to enable the driver to maintain higher<br />

speeds. The same precautions as<br />

normal for safe cornering and driving<br />

on slippery roads must be adopted, see<br />

pages 148/ 150.<br />

This symbol lights up when the system is<br />

operative.<br />

If the TCS or StabiliTrak ® system comes<br />

into action, it indicates that there is low friction<br />

between the tyres and road surface.<br />

Extra care must be taken.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 67 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

67<br />

TCS OFF or<br />

StabiliTrak ® OFF 3<br />

indicator light<br />

WARNING<br />

The system improves ride comfort and<br />

safety during normal driving. It must<br />

however not be regarded as a system<br />

to enable the driver to maintain higher<br />

speeds. The same precautions as<br />

normal for safe cornering and driving<br />

on slippery roads must be adopted, see<br />

pages 148/ 150.<br />

The symbol lights when:<br />

• a fault has been detected and has therefore<br />

been switched off<br />

• there is a fault in the ABS system<br />

The following message appears in DIC at<br />

the same time:<br />

or<br />

Traction control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Stability control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Have the system checked at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

See also Traction Control System (TCS) on<br />

page 148 and StabiliTrak ® 3 on page 150.<br />

SPORT mode indicator 3<br />

SPORT indicator light lights up when the<br />

SPORT button is pressed, see page 144.<br />

In SPORT mode, gear changes in the automatic<br />

gearbox occur at higher speeds (rpm)<br />

(engine and gearbox have sportier characteristics).<br />

Cars equipped with CDC (continuous<br />

Damping control) have slightly harder<br />

damping adapted to the sportier characteristics<br />

of the car.<br />

SPORT mode is disengaged by pressing<br />

the SPORT button or when the engine is<br />

switched off.<br />

Indicator, glow plug<br />

(cars with diesel engine)<br />

This light comes on when the ignition switch<br />

is turned to position 3 and the temperature<br />

of the coolant is below +5 °C. Start the<br />

engine once the indicator light has gone out;<br />

see page 128.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 68 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

68 Instruments and controls<br />

Automatic tyre pressure<br />

monitoring 3<br />

The lamp illuminates if the tyre pressure in<br />

one or more tyres is too low or a fault has<br />

arisen in the tyre pressure system, see<br />

page 214.<br />

If the tyre pressure system has warned or<br />

alarmed due to low pressure then the pressure<br />

must be reset to the recommended<br />

level so that the warning/alarm disappears.<br />

Below is an example of the message simultaneously<br />

shown on the DIC:<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front left. Check tyres.<br />

Auto checking of lights<br />

The warning and indicator lights shown<br />

above should come on when the ignition<br />

switch is turned to position 3. They should<br />

go out after about 4 seconds once the<br />

engine has started or after the fault-free<br />

self-diagnosis of each system or function.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 69 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

69<br />

Instruments<br />

Rev counter<br />

The rev counter displays the engine speed<br />

in thousands of revolutions per minute.<br />

A protective function (interruption of the fuel<br />

supply) limits the engine speed within the<br />

red zone.<br />

Speedometer<br />

The speedometer displays the speed of the<br />

car in miles per hour (mph). It receives information<br />

about vehicle speed from the ABS’s<br />

wheel sensors.<br />

Temperature gauge<br />

The temperature gauge shows the temperature<br />

of the coolant. The needle should be<br />

in the middle of the scale when the engine<br />

is at normal operating temperature.<br />

If the needle goes into the red zone (which<br />

can occur at high outside air temperatures<br />

or under heavy engine loads), choose the<br />

highest possible gear ratio and the lowest<br />

possible engine speed, and avoid changing<br />

down.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 70 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

70 Instruments and controls<br />

NOTICE<br />

If the needle goes into the red zone,<br />

despite these measures, stop the car in a<br />

suitable place and allow the engine to<br />

idle. If the needle continues to rise, switch<br />

off the engine.<br />

If the needle repeatedly enters the red zone,<br />

stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so and<br />

check the coolant level, see page 182.<br />

WARNING<br />

Never remove the expansion tank filler<br />

cap completely while the engine is warm.<br />

Slacken the cap carefully. The cooling<br />

system is pressurised - hot coolant and<br />

vapour can escape when the filler cap is<br />

released.<br />

Fuel gauge<br />

When less than about 10 litres of fuel is left<br />

in the tank, an warning light on the main<br />

instrument panel comes on.<br />

Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,<br />

the amount of fuel required to fill the tank<br />

may be less than the specified tank<br />

capacity.<br />

Refuelling, see page 133.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 71 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

DIC (Driver Information<br />

Centre)<br />

DIC displays various types of information:<br />

milometer, trip meter, warnings, indications,<br />

trip computer information.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

71<br />

Milometer and trip meter<br />

The milometer displays the distance travelled<br />

in miles, and the trip meter in miles<br />

and tenths of miles. It lights when the car<br />

is unlocked or when the door is opened<br />

and the car is unlocked. In other instances,<br />

it lights with a press of the reset button.<br />

If a message takes up two rows of text, it<br />

overrides the milometer and trip meter.<br />

• The engaged gear is displayed on the left<br />

(cars with automatic transmission).<br />

• The upper row displays trip computer<br />

information while the lower row displays<br />

the trip meter and milometer.<br />

When a message is displayed:<br />

If a message takes up two rows of text, it<br />

overrides the milometer and trip meter.<br />

• The symbol corresponding to the text<br />

message is displayed on the left.<br />

• The text message is displayed in the<br />

centre.<br />

The warnings and indications that can be<br />

shown on the DIC are listed on page 249.<br />

If there is more than one message, a plus<br />

sign is shown to the left of the first message.<br />

Each message is shown for 10 seconds.<br />

DIC, control unit and display<br />

Press the CLR button to acknowledge the<br />

DIC message. The text and the symbol or<br />

just the text disappears. If you acknowledge<br />

a message but do not rectify the problem,<br />

the message will be shown the next time the<br />

car is started.<br />

When the engine is switched off the warning/indicator<br />

lights still active are displayed,<br />

this is to remind the driver. At this point the<br />

warning/indicator lights previously acknowledged<br />

with the CLR button are also displayed.<br />

In some of the car’s systems, such as the<br />

alarm and rain sensor, you can make your<br />

own settings. See page 75.<br />

Reset button<br />

The reset button is positioned immediately<br />

to the left of the speedometer.<br />

Reset the trip meter by pressing the reset<br />

button once when the ignition is on.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 72 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

72 Instruments and controls<br />

Trip computer functions in DIC<br />

WARNING<br />

Trip computer settings should be made<br />

while the car is stationary so that you are<br />

not distracted from the traffic.<br />

DIC has the following functions:<br />

Temp<br />

D.T.E.<br />

(Distance<br />

To Empty)<br />

Fuel Ø<br />

Outside temperature<br />

Possible range with<br />

remaining fuel. When the<br />

possible range is less<br />

than 30 km, the text Refill<br />

fuel now is displayed<br />

Average fuel consumption<br />

since function last<br />

reset<br />

Dist<br />

Speed Ø<br />

SPD W<br />

Settings<br />

Phone 3<br />

Distance to destinations.<br />

Function can also be<br />

used as a trip meter<br />

Average speed<br />

Speed warning<br />

Settings such as alarm<br />

time, language, rain<br />

sensor 3<br />

Handling of e.g. number<br />

lists, see Infotainment<br />

manual<br />

When the engine is started, the function<br />

that was selected when the engine was<br />

switched off is displayed, with the following<br />

exceptions:<br />

• Temp is displayed if the outside temperature<br />

is between –3 °C and +3 °C<br />

• D.T.E. appears if the amount of fuel is only<br />

enough for max. 50 km<br />

Outside temperature<br />

WARNING<br />

Bear in mind that ice can develop on the<br />

road surface even at air temperatures<br />

over +3 °C, especially on bridges and<br />

shady stretches of road.<br />

The Temp function is always activated<br />

when the outside temperature is within<br />

the interval –3 °C and +3 °C.<br />

If the temperature sensor, located under<br />

the front bumper, is covered by snow or ice,<br />

temperature readings will be unreliable.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 73 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

73<br />

Setting values<br />

1 Select the function using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

• SPD W (preset to 55 mph (90 km/h))<br />

• Dist (preset to 100 miles/100 km if not<br />

previously set)<br />

• Speed Ø<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3 Press the steering wheel buttons,<br />

or to change the value (the value can<br />

be reset with button CLR).<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Using DIST as a trip meter<br />

1Select Dist using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

2 Press and hold the CLR button for<br />

approx. 1 second.<br />

An arrow will now appear on the right-hand<br />

side of the display, indicating that the trip<br />

meter is running.<br />

Resetting a single function<br />

1 Select the function to be reset using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

• Fuel Ø (the value is reset<br />

to 10l/100 km)<br />

• Speed Ø<br />

• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)<br />

2 Press and hold the CLR button for<br />

approx. 1 second.<br />

The selected function will now be reset.<br />

Resetting the trip computer<br />

1 Press and hold the CLR button (approx.<br />

3 seconds) until audible confirmation is<br />

given.<br />

The following functions will be reset:<br />

• Fuel Ø (the value is reset<br />

to 10l/100 km)<br />

• Speed Ø<br />

• D.T.E. (the value is reset to the distance<br />

that can be reached with the amount<br />

of remaining fuel if fuel consumption is<br />

10 l/100 km; lower fuel consumption<br />

increases this distance)<br />

• Trip (Dist used as trip meter)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 74 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

74 Instruments and controls<br />

Speed warning<br />

This value is preset to 55 mph (90 km/h).<br />

The value can be set to between<br />

0 and 150 mph (0–250 km/h).<br />

On some markets, the value is locked<br />

at 120 km/h and cannot be changed.<br />

1Select SPD W using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until<br />

a chime sounds.<br />

3 Select speed using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The word ON on the right-hand side of the<br />

display indicates when the speed warning<br />

function is active.<br />

An audible alarm will sound if the set speed<br />

is exceeded.<br />

Disengage the function with the CLR button.<br />

Re-engage the function using the SET<br />

button.<br />

Calculating the arrival time<br />

(When will I arrive if I know how far I have to<br />

drive?)<br />

This function should be used before starting<br />

out a journey.<br />

To calculate the arrival time, the distance<br />

must first be given.<br />

1Select Dist using the steering wheel<br />

buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

1 Set how long it takes to get to the destination<br />

using the steering wheel buttons,<br />

or .<br />

2 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The estimated arrival time is displayed on<br />

the right-hand side of the display.<br />

If you take a break, this time is added to the<br />

estimated arrival time.<br />

During the trip, you can select Dist to display<br />

the estimated arrival time as well as<br />

how much longer you have to drive.<br />

After the distance to destination has<br />

decreased to zero, Dist will function as a trip<br />

meter (seeUsing DIST as a trip meter). The<br />

starting value for the trip meter will be the<br />

last distance set for the Dist function.<br />

Example: The Dist function is set to 100 km.<br />

After the count-down has reached 0 km,<br />

Dist will act as a trip meter beginning<br />

at 100 km.<br />

Calculating the arrival time if a specified<br />

average speed is maintained<br />

(When will I arrive if I know how far I have<br />

to drive and know what my average speed<br />

will be?)<br />

This function should be used before starting<br />

out a journey.<br />

First, set the distance under Dist.<br />

1 Then select the Speed Ø function using<br />

the steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3 Set an estimated average speed using<br />

the steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The time of arrival is updated during the<br />

journey based on the average speed since<br />

Dist was set. The speed of the car must<br />

exceed 12 mph (20 km/h).<br />

By selecting Dist during the journey, you<br />

can see how far is left.<br />

When Dist reaches zero Dist acts as a trip<br />

meter. The trip meter starts from the distance<br />

that was set previously.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 75 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Settings<br />

Parameters such as language and unit of<br />

measure are selected via this heading.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3 Select the desired heading using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5 Make the desired settings using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

6 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Settings<br />

Block Heater, page 253.<br />

MANUAL START<br />

TIMER A, B or C<br />

Park Heater, page 253.<br />

MANUAL START<br />

TIMER A, B or C<br />

Rain Sensor, page 84.<br />

HIGH<br />

MEDIUM<br />

LOW<br />

Theft Alarm, page 54.<br />

FULL ALARM<br />

DOOR ONLY<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

Park Assistance, page 155.<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Alarm Clock, page 76.<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Language.<br />

ENGLISH<br />

DEUTSCH<br />

SVENSKA<br />

FRANÇAIS<br />

ITALIANO<br />

ESPAÑOL<br />

Speed Scale Illumin.<br />

0-260 km/h<br />

0-140 km/h<br />

75


460_OM_MY09.book Page 76 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

76 Instruments and controls<br />

Units.<br />

METRIC<br />

US<br />

IMPERIAL<br />

Next Service: xx %<br />

INTERMEDIATE<br />

MAIN<br />

MAIN & INTERMED.<br />

Time for Service<br />

Reset Service Check?<br />

YES NO<br />

TCS,page 148<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ESP (StabiliTrak ® ), page 150<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Alarm<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Alarm Clock using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5 Make the desired settings.<br />

6 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

The alarm function is now active. Switch off<br />

the alarm with a brief press on the CLR button.<br />

To activate the same alarm time on another<br />

day, select Settings and then Alarm Clock.<br />

Then briefly press the SET button.<br />

Explanation of the various selections under<br />

Settings.<br />

Language<br />

Select the desired language. The<br />

number of languages can vary<br />

between markets.<br />

Units<br />

Select the desired group of units.<br />

Next Service: xx %<br />

The DIC includes two mutually<br />

independent counters, one for the<br />

main service and one for the intermediate<br />

service. When a service is<br />

carried out, e.g. intermediate<br />

service, the counter is reset for the<br />

intermediate service. The counter<br />

for the other service type, main<br />

service, continues unaffected. This<br />

means that once a service has<br />

been carried out, the counter may<br />

show e.g. 47% even though a<br />

service has just been carried out.<br />

The percentage refers, then, to the<br />

other service type.<br />

MAIN<br />

Main services are carried out at<br />

specific meter settings. This<br />

interval varies depending on<br />

market and engine variant. Contact<br />

a workshop for more information.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 77 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

INTERMEDIATE<br />

The intermediate service, on the<br />

other hand, is carried out<br />

depending on the number of cold<br />

starts and the climate conditions in<br />

which the car is driven, for example.<br />

This is why the interval for this type<br />

of service varies.<br />

MAIN & INTERMED.<br />

A combined service is carried out<br />

when the counters of both service<br />

types are close to one another.<br />

Time for Service<br />

A message regarding Time for<br />

Service must only be reset after a carried<br />

out service.<br />

Reset Service Check?<br />

Resetting the service indication,<br />

see this page.<br />

Resetting the service check<br />

Reset the service check as follows:<br />

1 Turn the remote control to position. The<br />

engine must be switched off.<br />

2 Keep the brake pedal depressed (cars<br />

with diesel engine only).<br />

3Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

5Select Time for Service. Press the SET<br />

button.<br />

6Select Reset Service Check? Press<br />

the SET button.<br />

7 When asked Reset Service Check?<br />

select YES.<br />

8 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

9 Release the brake pedal (cars with<br />

diesel engine only).<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

77<br />

Analogue clock<br />

The analogue clock is set manually. It is not<br />

linked to the clock in the radio display.<br />

A brief press on the button beneath the<br />

clock will move the minute indicator forward<br />

one minute. Hold the button depressed for a<br />

major adjustment. The clock cannot be<br />

adjusted back in time.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 78 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

78 Instruments and controls<br />

Switches<br />

Lights off<br />

The car’s exterior lights are off.<br />

The headlights can be flashed.<br />

Position lights<br />

The position lights can be turned on irrespective<br />

of the position of the ignition<br />

switch. If the position lights are on and the<br />

driver’s door is opened, a reminder to turn<br />

them off will sound.<br />

Do not use the positions lights alone while<br />

driving.<br />

Light switches<br />

Headlights<br />

Dipped beam comes on when the ignition is<br />

switched on and goes off when the ignition<br />

switch is turned all the way back.<br />

Dip switch<br />

1 Headlight flasher<br />

2 Main/dipped beam<br />

Main/dipped beam<br />

To switch between main and dipped beam,<br />

pull the dip switch all the way towards the<br />

steering wheel.<br />

The symbol on the main instrument<br />

panel shows when the main beam is on.<br />

Headlight flasher<br />

To flash your headlights, pull the dip switch<br />

half-way towards the steering wheel. The<br />

main beam will remain on until you release<br />

the switch.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 79 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Follow-me-home lighting<br />

The "Follow-me-home" delay function<br />

allows the headlights to remain on dipped<br />

beam and the reversing lights to remain on<br />

for about 30 seconds after the driver’s door<br />

has been closed.<br />

1 Remove the remote control.<br />

2 Open the driver’s door.<br />

3 Pull the dip switch all the way towards<br />

the steering wheel.<br />

The function is active for 30 seconds after<br />

the door is closed.<br />

Adjusting instrument illumination<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

79<br />

Instrument illumination<br />

The brightness of the instrument illumination<br />

can be adjusted by pressing the button.<br />

Headlight levelling 3<br />

Cars with halogen lights<br />

This system enables the angle of the headlight<br />

beam to be adjusted depending on how<br />

the car is loaded.<br />

Turn the light switch anticlockwise to the<br />

desired position. Note: The switch cannot<br />

be turned past position 3.<br />

The system comprises an adjustment motor<br />

for each headlight and a control on the<br />

instrument panel. Adjustments must be<br />

made when the ignition is in position 3.<br />

Special equipment is required for adjusting<br />

the basic headlight alignment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 80 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

80 Instruments and controls<br />

The switch’s three settings are designed for<br />

the following loads:<br />

Number of<br />

passengers<br />

1 2-3 rear seat<br />

passengers<br />

and possibly<br />

1 front seat<br />

passenger.<br />

2 2-3 rear seat<br />

passengers.<br />

Load<br />

Max. 30 kg.<br />

40-80 kg in<br />

luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

3 1-2 Maximum load<br />

in luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

or<br />

1-4 Maximum load<br />

in luggage<br />

compartment and<br />

a caravan or trailer.<br />

If the car has halogen lights and headlight<br />

beam length adjustment in combination with<br />

all-wheel drive (AWD) 3 then beam length<br />

adjustment only needs to be carried out with<br />

the following loads to reduce the risk of dazzling<br />

other road users:<br />

Position<br />

Position<br />

Number of<br />

passengers<br />

Load<br />

1 1–4 Maximum load in<br />

luggage<br />

compartment and/or<br />

a caravan or trailer.<br />

Cars with Xenon headlights 3<br />

Cars with Xenon headlights have an automatic<br />

headlight levelling system 3. This<br />

system is calibrated automatically each<br />

time the engine is started.<br />

If a fault arises in the automatic headlight<br />

levelling system, the headlights will be<br />

angled down to avoid dazzling drivers in<br />

oncoming traffic. Adjust your speed accordingly<br />

as the range of the headlights will be<br />

reduced. Check fuse 20 in the engine bay<br />

electrical centre, see page 208.<br />

If the system malfunctions, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Headlight levelling<br />

malfunction.<br />

Rear fog light<br />

To turn on the rear fog light, press the rear<br />

fog light button on the instrument panel. The<br />

headlights or front fog lights must be on.<br />

The rear fog light is automatically turned off<br />

when the engine is switched off. When the<br />

car is next started, the rear fog light will have<br />

to be switched back on manually by pressing<br />

the rear fog light switch. If the engine is<br />

restarted within 30 seconds, the rear fog<br />

light will remain on.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the legal<br />

provisions governing the use of rear<br />

fog lights.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 81 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

81<br />

WARNING<br />

In poor visibility, avoid following the tail<br />

lights of the vehicle in front. There is a risk<br />

of driving too close. If the vehicle brakes<br />

suddenly, you may be unable to avoid a<br />

collision and therefore risk injury to yourself<br />

and others.<br />

Front fog lights 3<br />

Some model variants have fog lights fitted in<br />

the front spoiler. These should be used in<br />

poor visibility.<br />

The fog lights are automatically turned off<br />

when the engine is switched off. When the<br />

car is next started, the fog lights will have to<br />

be switched back on manually by pressing<br />

the fog light switch. If the engine is restarted<br />

within 30 seconds, the front fog lights will<br />

remain on.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the legal<br />

provisions governing the use of front<br />

fog lights.<br />

Direction indicators<br />

1 Right<br />

2 Left<br />

Direction indicators<br />

The stalk switch has an intermediate,<br />

spring-loaded position that is useful for signalling<br />

when changing lanes or overtaking.<br />

The stalk switch also has fixed positions for<br />

indicating a right or left turn, that are cancelled<br />

automatically when the steering<br />

wheel is centred.<br />

If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency<br />

with which the indicators flash will be doubled.<br />

This frequency is also doubled if a caravan<br />

or trailer is being towed and one of its indicator<br />

bulbs breaks.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 82 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

82 Instruments and controls<br />

Priority of audible information<br />

If two or more of these functions are active<br />

simultaneously, the most important function<br />

at that time will be prioritized.<br />

If, for example, the direction indicators are<br />

active when you engage reverse, the parking<br />

aid system (if fitted) will be heard instead<br />

of the direction indicators. When reverse is<br />

disengaged, the direction indicators will be<br />

heard, if they are still active.<br />

Hazard warning lights<br />

The button for the hazard warning lights<br />

is located on the climate control panel.<br />

When the button is pressed, all the direction<br />

indicators and the symbol in the button flash<br />

simultaneously.<br />

If an indicator bulb breaks, the frequency<br />

with which the indicators flash will be doubled.<br />

Hazard warning lights should only be used<br />

if, because of an accident or breakdown, the<br />

car constitutes a hazard to other road users.<br />

Warning triangle 3<br />

The warning triangle is stowed on the<br />

luggage compartment floor.<br />

WARNING<br />

Position the warning triangle at the side of<br />

the road 50–100 metres behind the car to<br />

give advance warning to approaching<br />

vehicles. If the car is not clearly visible<br />

(e.g. over the brow of a hill or a bridge),<br />

place the triangle even further back.<br />

Reversing lights<br />

The reversing lights come on automatically<br />

when reverse gear is engaged or selected.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 83 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Wipers and washers<br />

Windscreen wipers<br />

Position 1 is a spring-loaded position that<br />

will produce a single sweep of the wipers.<br />

Set the delay period for intermittent wiping<br />

using the thumb wheel on the stalk switch.<br />

There are 5 delay periods from which to<br />

choose, ranging from 2 to 15 seconds.<br />

The wipers always return to their home<br />

position when the ignition is turned off.<br />

To leave the wipers positioned vertically on<br />

the windscreen, proceed as follows:<br />

1 Switch off the engine and remove the<br />

remote control.<br />

2 Activate the wipers within the next<br />

16 seconds by pressing the stalk<br />

switch down.<br />

The next time the ignition is turned on, the<br />

stalk switch must be pressed down once so<br />

that the wipers return to their home position.<br />

Changing wiper blades, see page 188.<br />

Windscreen wipers<br />

0 OFF<br />

1 Single sweep<br />

2 Intermittent wiping<br />

3 Low speed<br />

4 High speed<br />

5 Windscreen and headlight washers 3<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

83<br />

Washers<br />

Activate the washers by pulling the stalk<br />

switch towards the steering wheel.<br />

When the washers are operated, the wipers<br />

will make 3, 4 or 5 sweeps, depending on<br />

how long the washers were kept on. If<br />

the speed of the car is less than 12 mph<br />

(20 km/h), the wipers will make an additional<br />

sweep after roughly 8 seconds.<br />

If the amount of fluid is less than 1 litre,<br />

headlight washing 3 is not activated as a<br />

means of prioritizing washing of the windscreen.<br />

The following message appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 84 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

84 Instruments and controls<br />

Rain sensor 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Turn the rain sensor off if the ignition is<br />

ON to avoid personal injury when clearing<br />

snow and ice from the windscreen.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Control for setting intermittent wiper delay.<br />

Washers, headlights 3<br />

The headlights are washed at the same time<br />

as the windscreen if the headlights are on.<br />

The headlight washers are activated when<br />

the windscreen washers have been active<br />

for 0.6 s.<br />

The headlights are washed every fifth time<br />

the windscreen washers are used or if<br />

2 minutes have elapsed since the windscreen<br />

was last washed.<br />

The headlight washers are not activated at<br />

speeds in excess of 125 mph (200 km/h).<br />

Turn the rain sensor off before washing<br />

the car in an automatic car wash, to avoid<br />

damaging the windscreen wipers.<br />

The indicator in the DIC is lit when the<br />

rain sensor is activated.<br />

The rain sensor automatically controls the<br />

windscreen wipers. The sensor is located<br />

on the windscreen beside the rear view mirror.<br />

The system varies the frequency of wiping<br />

between single sweeps and continuous<br />

wiping, depending on the amount of precipitation.<br />

Activate the rain sensor by lifting the stalk<br />

switch to the AUTO position. The wipers<br />

make one sweep for reference to see how<br />

much water is on the windscreen. In future,<br />

the sensor compares the amount of water<br />

on the windscreen with this reference value.<br />

Windscreen wipers with rain sensor<br />

0 OFF<br />

1 Single sweep<br />

2 AUTO - rain sensor engaged<br />

3 Low speed<br />

4 High speed<br />

5 Windscreen and headlight washers 3<br />

If the stalk switch is left in the AUTO position<br />

when the engine is switched off, when the<br />

engine is next started it must first be moved<br />

to the 0 or 3 position and then back to AUTO<br />

to reactivate the sensor.<br />

If the system malfunctions, the wipers will<br />

operate at low speed when the stalk switch<br />

is set to the AUTO position.<br />

The following message appears on the DIC<br />

at the same time:<br />

Rain sensor malfunc.<br />

Contact service.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 85 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

85<br />

Adjusting sensitivity<br />

The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be<br />

adjusted in Settings. If you increase the<br />

sensitivity, the wipers will make one sweep<br />

for reference.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Rain Sensor using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5 Select sensitivity using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

6 Confirm this selection by pressing the<br />

SET button.<br />

Rain Sensor<br />

HIGH<br />

MEDIUM<br />

LOW<br />

Explanation of sensor sensitivity.<br />

HIGH<br />

The sensor is set to high sensitivity.<br />

The wipers start when there is only a<br />

small amount of water on the windscreen.<br />

MEDIUM<br />

The sensor has normal sensitivity.<br />

LOW<br />

The sensor is set to low sensitivity.<br />

The sensitivity of the sensor is also affected<br />

by the amount of daylight. The sensor is<br />

somewhat more sensitive at night. This<br />

adjustment is automatic.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 86 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

86 Instruments and controls<br />

Rear window wiper, Wagon<br />

To obtain:<br />

• a single sweep: move the control to position<br />

2, the control springs back to the<br />

home position.<br />

• intermittent wiping, 6 seconds: move the<br />

control to position 2.<br />

If the windscreen wipers are activated<br />

then the rear window wiper will automatically<br />

change over to intermittent wiping<br />

when reverse gear is engaged and the<br />

engine is running.<br />

• washing and wiping: move the control to<br />

position 3.<br />

The control returns to the home position.<br />

The wiper makes 3 sweeps after the<br />

washing has finished. If the speed of the<br />

car is below 40 km/h when the washing<br />

has finished the wiper makes an extra<br />

sweep after 5 seconds to wipe off any<br />

washer fluid residue.<br />

The washer jet is not adjustable.<br />

Changing wiper blades, see page 188.<br />

When the washer fluid level drops below 1<br />

litre, the rear window washer is deactivated.<br />

This is in order to prioritize the windscreen.<br />

The following message is displayed on the<br />

DIC:<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

Rear window wiper, Wagon<br />

1 OFF<br />

2 Intermittent wiping<br />

3 Washing and wiping


460_OM_MY09.book Page 87 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Automatic climate<br />

control (ACC) 3<br />

The Automatic Climate Control system<br />

(ACC) maintains the desired temperature<br />

inside the car, regardless of the outside<br />

temperature and weather conditions.<br />

The system will achieve the desired temperature<br />

in the quickest possible way. Note that<br />

selecting a higher or lower temperature than<br />

that desired will not speed up the process.<br />

For the ACC system to be most effective, all<br />

windows (and sunroof, if fitted) should be<br />

closed.<br />

Fresh air for the cabin is drawn in through an<br />

inlet grille adjacent to the bottom edge of the<br />

windscreen. It passes through a filter before<br />

reaching the ACC system and delivery into<br />

the cabin. The air is evacuated via openings<br />

in the rear parcel shelf and then on through<br />

outlets on both sides of the car behind the<br />

rear bumper.<br />

The incoming air is treated in three stages:<br />

first it passes through a filter; it is then dehumidified<br />

and cooled; and finally, if required,<br />

it is heated.<br />

The filter is a combined particle and charcoal<br />

filter. It is so efficient that levels of noxious<br />

substances such as benzene and toluene<br />

are also reduced.<br />

ACC panel<br />

1 Temperature setting: left-hand side<br />

2 AUTO: All settings selected automatically<br />

3 <strong>Manual</strong> setting of fan speed<br />

4 <strong>Manual</strong> setting of air distribution<br />

5 Temperature setting: right-hand side<br />

To reduce potential misting on the insides of<br />

the windows, the glass should be cleaned<br />

with a proprietary glass cleaner. How often<br />

this will need to be done depends on how<br />

clean the air is - if there are smokers in the<br />

car, the windows will need to be cleaned<br />

more frequently.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

6 Recirculation: ON/OFF<br />

7 Heated front seat 3, right side<br />

8 Rear window heating: ON/OFF<br />

9 A/C compressor: ON/OFF<br />

10 Heated front seat 3, left side<br />

87


460_OM_MY09.book Page 88 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

88 Instruments and controls<br />

1 Sun sensor<br />

2 Cabin temperature sensor<br />

The system has seven sensors:<br />

• Outside air temperature sensor.<br />

• Cabin temperature sensor (above rear<br />

view mirror).<br />

• Sun sensor (mounted on top of the<br />

fascia).<br />

• Two blended air temperature sensors<br />

(located in the front floor vents).<br />

• Two blended air temperature sensors<br />

(located in the outer panel vents).<br />

Note:<br />

The climate control system will not function<br />

properly if the sun sensor is covered.<br />

Panel vent<br />

Panel vents<br />

The air vents can be adjusted so that airflow<br />

can be directed as desired. In winter, for<br />

instance, the outer vents can be directed<br />

onto the door windows for enhanced<br />

demisting.<br />

The amount of air delivered via the panel<br />

vents can be individually controlled by the<br />

regulator on each one. The climate control<br />

system works best if the panel vents are<br />

open. If you find the air cold or that it is<br />

draughty, start by directing the air away<br />

from the body.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 89 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Temperature control<br />

The cabin is divided into two temperature<br />

zones:<br />

• Driver’s zone;<br />

• Passenger zone (front and rear seats).<br />

The temperature can be controlled within<br />

the interval 16 and 26 °C.<br />

The selected temperature is not the actual<br />

air temperature, but corresponds to the<br />

comfort level normally experienced at that<br />

temperature after allowance has been<br />

made for the air flow, relative humidity, solar<br />

radiation, etc., currently prevailing inside<br />

the car.<br />

• The most usual temperature setting<br />

is 18–24 °C, depending on personal<br />

preference and what clothing is worn.<br />

• It is recommended that changes in the<br />

temperature setting be made in steps<br />

of 1 °C.<br />

Once the desired climate has been<br />

achieved, the rear centre vents can be<br />

closed to prevent warm air being distributed<br />

at face height.<br />

When the ignition is switched off, only the<br />

temperature control affects the system the<br />

next time the engine is started. The system<br />

will warm up/cool down to the temperature<br />

to which the control is set.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

89<br />

MAX heating (red indicator)<br />

The MAX heating setting is obtained by<br />

turning the temperature control to the first<br />

position past 26 (to the red LED). The<br />

driver’s side selection regulates air distribution<br />

and recirculation status. Temperature,<br />

however, can be adjusted on the passenger<br />

side.<br />

Settings when MAX heating is selected:<br />

• Maximum heat.<br />

• Air distribution to windscreen and floor.<br />

• Recirculation OFF.<br />

• High fan speed.<br />

MAX cooling (blue indicator)<br />

The MAX cooling setting is obtained by turning<br />

the temperature control to the first position<br />

past 16 (to the blue LED). The driver’s<br />

side selection regulates air distribution and<br />

recirculation status. Temperature, however,<br />

can be adjusted on the passenger side.<br />

Settings when MAX cooling is selected:<br />

• Max. cooling effect (A/C compressor will<br />

run even if AC OFF has been selected).<br />

• Air distribution through panel vents.<br />

• Maximum fan speed.<br />

• Recirculation ON.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 90 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Functions<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> settings are not affected by the system’s automation.<br />

Pressing AUTO will cancel all manual settings.<br />

The selected temperature is always maintained automatically.<br />

Temperature, air distribution, fan speed and recirculation<br />

will be controlled automatically.<br />

Pressing AUTO once will cancel all previous manual<br />

selections.<br />

The ACC system is in AUTO mode when the engine is<br />

started.<br />

A/C compressor OFF.<br />

No cooling of inlet air. Temperature, air distribution and<br />

fan speed still under automatic control.<br />

Turn the fan control anticlockwise until "OFF" lights up.<br />

ACC system OFF.<br />

Fan OFF.<br />

A/C compressor OFF.<br />

Air distribution selections locked in current settings.<br />

Recirculation can be selected manually.<br />

Front seat heating 3.<br />

Pressing the AUTO button will put the system into automatic<br />

mode.<br />

Reactivation by turning the fan control clockwise one<br />

click causes the system to resume any manual selections.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

90<br />

The rear window and door mirror heating is controlled<br />

manually.<br />

Deactivate the heating as soon as the rear window is<br />

free of ice and misting so as not to unnecessarily load<br />

the battery. Heating will deactivate automatically after<br />

a set time period.<br />

Turn the fan control to increase fan speed.<br />

If fan speed 0 is selected, the A/C compressor will be<br />

disengaged and the indicator on the AC OFF button will<br />

illuminate.<br />

Recirculation is controlled manually to optimize cooling<br />

although it can also be switched on and off manually.<br />

Recirculation does not appreciably change the air<br />

quality, but it can be beneficial to activate it manually to<br />

prevent unpleasant smells from entering the cabin.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 91 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

91 Instruments and controls<br />

Air distribution<br />

One press: When the defroster is chosen manually,<br />

all the windows (except the rear side windows,<br />

where the air flow is off) are demisted by:<br />

• High fan speed.<br />

• The air is directed to the defroster vents.<br />

• Temperature increases somewhat.<br />

• Recirculation OFF.<br />

• Activation of rear window/door mirror heating.<br />

The defroster function remains engaged until<br />

another selection is made. Heating of the rear<br />

window/door mirrors will, however, deactivate after<br />

a set time period.<br />

Two presses: Air is directed to the windscreen<br />

without the fan speed being increase or the rear<br />

window heating being switched on.<br />

To revert to a previous setting, press the AUTO button.<br />

Defroster and floor vents<br />

Floor<br />

Floor and panel vents


460_OM_MY09.book Page 92 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

92<br />

Initial settings in cold weather<br />

To start with, the system will automatically select the defroster setting,<br />

maximum heat and low fan speed.<br />

As the engine warms up, air will also be distributed through the floor<br />

vents and the fan speed will be increased.<br />

As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, both the<br />

fan speed and the heat will be decreased to a level determined by<br />

the system.<br />

Panel<br />

Initial settings in hot weather<br />

The system will automatically distribute air through the panel vents<br />

at high fan speed and will activate the A/C compressor (unless the<br />

AC ON switch has been pressed).<br />

If the ambient air temperature is over 25 °C, the recirculation cuts in<br />

after 0-15 seconds, if this is required in order to reach the desired<br />

temperature.<br />

As the temperature inside the car nears the selected value, the fan<br />

speed will be decreased to a value determined by the system.<br />

Defroster-floor-panel


460_OM_MY09.book Page 93 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Formation of ice and mist in<br />

extreme weather conditions<br />

It is only in the most extreme conditions that<br />

icing and misting of window glass are likely<br />

to be a problem, such as in torrential rain or<br />

severe cold coupled with high relative<br />

humidity, or when passengers are perspiring<br />

heavily or wearing wet clothes. The following<br />

measures are recommended if such<br />

problems should occur:<br />

1 Select AUTO and set the temperature<br />

to 21 °C.<br />

2 Select . If this is not enough ...<br />

3 Increase the fan speed. If this is not<br />

enough ...<br />

4 Select a higher temperature.<br />

Electric heating,<br />

front seats 3<br />

The seat cushions and backrests of the front<br />

seats are heated.<br />

Heating is thermostatically controlled.<br />

Heating has two settings.<br />

Instruments and controls<br />

93<br />

Calibration<br />

The ACC system is calibrated automatically<br />

every 40th start (if the ignition has been off<br />

for more than 2 hours) or if the battery has<br />

been disconnected.<br />

The system can be calibrated manually by<br />

pressing the AUTO button and recirculation<br />

button simultaneously.<br />

For instructions regarding using and<br />

programming the Park Heater and Block<br />

Heater, refer to page 252.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 94 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

94 Instruments and controls<br />

(This page has been left blank)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 95 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

95<br />

Interior equipment<br />

Steering wheel<br />

adjustment __________ 96<br />

Electric windows_______ 97<br />

Rear view mirrors ______ 100<br />

Sunroof 3 ____________ 102<br />

Interior lighting ________ 105<br />

Can holder 3 __________ 106<br />

Ashtrays 3____________ 107<br />

Storage compartments__ 108<br />

Luggage compartment __ 110<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 96 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

96 Interior equipment<br />

Steering wheel<br />

adjustment<br />

WARNING<br />

Only adjust the steering wheel while the<br />

car is stationary so that you are not distracted<br />

from the traffic.<br />

The height and reach of the steering wheel<br />

can be adjusted.<br />

There is a release lever under the steering<br />

column.<br />

1 Pull down the lever to release the<br />

steering wheel.<br />

2 Adjust the position of the steering wheel.<br />

3 Raise the lever to the locked position<br />

to lock the steering wheel in position.<br />

When returning the lever to the locked<br />

position, it may be necessary to adjust<br />

the position of the steering wheel slightly<br />

for the lock mechanism to engage correctly.<br />

Steering wheel lock, see page 126.<br />

Lever for steering wheel adjustment<br />

Horn<br />

Activate the horn by pressing one of the<br />

three areas on the steering wheel pad.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 97 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Electric windows<br />

Interior equipment<br />

97<br />

WARNING<br />

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when<br />

closing the side windows. Risk of serious<br />

or fatal injuries!<br />

• Always remove the remote control<br />

from the ignition switch when leaving<br />

the car. This prevents the electric windows<br />

from being activated, such as by<br />

children playing.<br />

• The person operating the electric<br />

window is responsible for ensuring<br />

that no one, especially a child, has<br />

their head, hands or fingers in the<br />

window openings, before raising the<br />

window.<br />

• Do not stick any part of the body or the<br />

head out through an open window<br />

while the car is moving.<br />

The electric windows are operated by<br />

means of switches in the door armrests.<br />

For the electric windows to work, the remote<br />

control must be in position 3 in the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

At the end of a journey and having removed<br />

the remote control, you can still operate the<br />

windows, so long as neither of the front<br />

doors has been opened.<br />

Window switches<br />

Windows having the automatic closing function<br />

(option) can be operated as long as the<br />

car is unlocked up to 20 minutes after the<br />

remote control has been removed from the<br />

ignition switch.<br />

To open<br />

Press down the front edge of the button one<br />

step.<br />

The window will stop when it is fully open or<br />

when the button is released.<br />

Automatic opening: Press the button all<br />

the way down and release it.<br />

Window switch in rear door<br />

Comfort opening 3<br />

Comfort opening is the remote opening of<br />

windows and the sunroof 3.<br />

Press and hold the unlocking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows and<br />

sunroof 3 start to open (approx. 2 s).<br />

During comfort opening and closing of the<br />

windows/sunroof 3, the range is reduced by<br />

approximately half of normal range.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 98 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

98 Interior equipment<br />

To close<br />

WARNING<br />

Take care when closing a window to<br />

ensure that no one gets caught.<br />

Raise the front edge of the button one step.<br />

The window will stop when it is fully closed<br />

or when the button is released.<br />

Automatic closing 3: Raise the button all<br />

the way and release it. If the window does<br />

not close automatically, refer to Calibration<br />

on page 99.<br />

Comfort closing 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure no one is so close to the car<br />

that they can be injured if comfort closing<br />

is activated.<br />

Comfort closing of the front windows means<br />

that open windows and the sunroof 3 are<br />

closed and the electrically retractable door<br />

mirrors 3 are retracted.<br />

Press and hold the locking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows are<br />

closed and door mirrors retracted (takes<br />

roughly 2 s). The doors must be shut.<br />

During comfort opening and closing of the<br />

windows/sunroof 3, the range is reduced<br />

by approximately half of normal range.<br />

Confirmation that closing has finished is<br />

provided by the direction indicators, which<br />

flash once. No confirmation indicates that<br />

closing was not possible. This may be due<br />

to a door being open or a window requiring<br />

calibration.<br />

Deactivating the rear window<br />

switches<br />

The in the driver’s door deactivates the<br />

window switches in the rear doors.<br />

The illuminated switch will change colour<br />

from green to orange (deactivated).<br />

Pinch protection 3<br />

On certain model variants, the front electric<br />

windows are equipped with pinch protection.<br />

This is activated if something gets<br />

trapped between the window pane and door<br />

frame when the window is closed. The<br />

window will stop and lower slightly.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 99 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

99<br />

Button for temporary deactivation of rear<br />

door window switches and temporary<br />

override of window pinch protection<br />

Overriding the pinch protection<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure nothing obstructs the window<br />

when it is closed without pinch protection.<br />

If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance<br />

that the pinch protection engages in<br />

the front electric windows (the window<br />

cannot be closed), the pinch protection can<br />

be temporarily disengaged and the window<br />

closed.<br />

1 Make sure the ignition is in position 3.<br />

2 Press and hold the button on the<br />

driver’s door while operating the window<br />

in question.<br />

3 Close the window in question.<br />

The pinch protection will be active the next<br />

time a window is operated.<br />

Calibration<br />

WARNING<br />

The pinch protection will not be engaged<br />

after a power break until the electric windows<br />

have been calibrated.<br />

The front electric windows should be calibrated<br />

if automatic closing does not work or<br />

if the battery has been disconnected. The<br />

pinch protection will not work if the windows<br />

are not calibrated 3.<br />

Calibration is performed as follows:<br />

1 Close the doors.<br />

2 The car must be running at idling speed.<br />

The battery charger must not be connected<br />

to the car’s battery during calibration.<br />

3 Open the window fully, the button must<br />

be kept depressed the whole time.<br />

4 Close the window fully, the button must<br />

be kept raised the whole time and for<br />

approx. 1 second after the window has<br />

closed.<br />

5 Open the window fully, the button must<br />

be kept depressed the whole time and<br />

for approx. 1 second after the window<br />

has fully opened.<br />

6 Close the window fully, and keep the<br />

button raised until the calibration is<br />

confirmed with a "chime".<br />

Repeat steps 3-6 for the windows which<br />

require calibration.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 100 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

100 Interior equipment<br />

Rear view mirrors<br />

Door mirrors<br />

To adjust<br />

The door mirrors are electrically adjustable<br />

and heated. The controls for adjusting the<br />

mirrors are on the driver’s door:<br />

1 Select a door mirror with the upper<br />

button.<br />

2 Adjust the mirror using the touch pad.<br />

The mirror glass can also be adjusted manually<br />

by gently pressing the glass in the<br />

desired direction.<br />

The mirror heating is turned on together with<br />

the rear window heating.<br />

If the car has an electrically adjustable<br />

driver’s seat with memory, the mirror<br />

settings are stored in the memory, see<br />

page 23.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> retraction<br />

The door mirrors are designed to fold back<br />

if knocked. The mirrors can also be<br />

retracted manually. This can be useful when<br />

parking in tight spaces, such as on the car<br />

deck of a ferry. Remember to return the door<br />

mirrors to their normal positions before<br />

driving off.<br />

1 Selection of mirror<br />

2 Touch pad for adjustment<br />

3 Electrical retraction<br />

4 Reversing position (electric)<br />

Electrical retraction 3<br />

Press the button under the touch pad.<br />

The mirrors can be retracted up to speeds<br />

of 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above<br />

20 mph (30 km/h), the mirrors will be folded<br />

out. The mirrors can also be operated with<br />

the remote control. Refer to Comfort<br />

closing 3 on page 103.<br />

Retracting a door mirror<br />

Reversing position 3<br />

The passenger-side mirror glass can be<br />

angled down to facilitate reversing. Press<br />

the button shown in the illustration. This<br />

is located under the touch pad. Return the<br />

mirror to its normal position by pressing the<br />

button again. The mirror will also return to its<br />

normal position automatically if you drive<br />

forward approximately 20 metres.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 101 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

101<br />

Mirror position lever<br />

1 Normal position<br />

2 Anti dazzle position<br />

Interior rear view mirror<br />

The interior rear view mirror is of the anti<br />

dazzle type and can be deflected with the<br />

lever on its underside. Certain variants have<br />

an auto dimming rear view mirror.<br />

The lever should be in the normal position<br />

when you adjust the mirror.<br />

Interior rear view mirror with auto<br />

dimming 3<br />

Press button 2 to activate auto dimming.<br />

The rear view mirror has two sensors: one<br />

forward-facing and one rear-facing sensor.<br />

The forward-facing sensor detects whether<br />

it is dark outside.<br />

The rear-facing sensor detects, for<br />

example, if the car following has not dipped<br />

its headlights. The rear view mirror is then<br />

darkened to prevent the strong light source<br />

from dazzling the driver. This darkening is<br />

stepless.<br />

The mirror returns to its normal state when<br />

the strong light source diminishes.<br />

The system is disengaged when reverse<br />

gear is selected.<br />

Towing a tall trailer can render the system<br />

inoperative, as light from the vehicle behind<br />

will not reach the rear-facing sensor.<br />

Auto dimming door mirrors 3<br />

If the car has auto dimming door mirrors,<br />

they are regulated by the same sensors<br />

as the rear view mirror.<br />

1 Forward-facing sensor<br />

2 Auto dimming ON/OFF<br />

3 Rear-facing sensor


460_OM_MY09.book Page 102 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

102 Interior equipment<br />

Sunroof 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Bear in mind the pinch hazard when<br />

closing the electric sunroof. Risk of<br />

serious or fatal injuries!<br />

• Always remove the remote control<br />

from the ignition switch when you<br />

leave the car. This prevents the electric<br />

sunroof from being activated, such<br />

as by children playing.<br />

• The person operating the electric sunroof<br />

is responsible for ensuring that no<br />

one, especially a child, has their head,<br />

hands or fingers in the opening, before<br />

closing the sunroof.<br />

• Do not stick any part of the body or the<br />

head out through the sunroof while the<br />

car is moving.<br />

The sunroof is operated by the control in the<br />

roof console. For the sunroof to work, the<br />

remote control must be in position 3 in the<br />

ignition switch.<br />

If the car is equipped with windows having<br />

the automatic closing function, the sunroof<br />

can be opened and closed, so long as the<br />

car is unlocked, until 20 minutes has passed<br />

since the remote control was removed from<br />

the ignition switch.<br />

Sunroof control<br />

1 <strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled opening<br />

2 Automatic opening<br />

3 <strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled closing<br />

To open<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled opening<br />

Slide the control rearward to its first position.<br />

The sunroof will halt when you release the<br />

control. If you do not release the control, the<br />

sunroof will open to the comfort position. To<br />

open the sunroof further, release the control<br />

and then once again press it rearward.<br />

Automatic opening<br />

Slide the control rearward to the second<br />

position and release it. The sunroof will<br />

open to the comfort position. To open the<br />

sunroof further, slide the control rearward a<br />

second time.<br />

4 Automatic closing<br />

5 Ventilation position<br />

Sunroof without automatic opening<br />

Slide the control rearward to position 1 (see<br />

illustration). The sunroof will stop when you<br />

release the control or once it is fully open.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 103 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

103<br />

To close<br />

WARNING<br />

Exercise great care when closing the sunroof<br />

to ensure that nothing gets trapped.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly controlled closing<br />

Slide the control forward to its first position.<br />

The sunroof will halt when you release the<br />

control.<br />

Automatic closing 3<br />

Slide the control forward to its second position<br />

and release it. The sunroof will close<br />

fully.<br />

The sunroof pinch protection halts closing<br />

and opens the sunroof slightly if something<br />

obstructs closing.<br />

Sunroof without automatic closing 3<br />

Slide the control forward to position 3 (see<br />

illustration). The sunroof will stop when you<br />

release the control or once it is fully closed.<br />

Ventilation position (rear edge of<br />

sunroof open)<br />

• To open – press the control up.<br />

• To close – slide the control forward to the<br />

second position.<br />

It is also possible to select the ventilation<br />

position when the sunroof is open by<br />

pressing in the control. The sunroof will then<br />

close automatically. Press the control once<br />

more to open the sunroof to its ventilation<br />

position.<br />

If you wish to open the sunroof fully from the<br />

ventilation position, you must first close it<br />

(slide the control forward). You can then<br />

slide the control rearward to open the sunroof.<br />

The sunroof incorporates an interior,<br />

manual, sliding sun blind.<br />

Sunroof without automatic closing 3<br />

• To open – press the control up.<br />

• To close – slide the control forward to<br />

position 3.<br />

Comfort opening 3<br />

Comfort opening is the remote opening of<br />

windows and the sunroof 3.<br />

Press and hold the unlocking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows and<br />

sunroof 3 start to open (approx. 2 s).<br />

If the sunroof is in the ventilation position, it<br />

will not open.<br />

Comfort closing 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure no one is so close to the car<br />

that they can be injured if comfort closing<br />

is activated.<br />

Comfort closing of the front windows means<br />

that open windows and the sunroof 3 are<br />

closed and the electrically retractable door<br />

mirrors 3 are retracted.<br />

Press and hold the locking button on the<br />

remote control until the windows are<br />

closed and door mirrors retracted (takes<br />

roughly 2 s). The doors must be shut.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 104 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

104 Interior equipment<br />

Pinch protection 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure nothing obstructs the sunroof<br />

when it is closed without pinch protection.<br />

The sunroof is equipped with pinch protection.<br />

This is activated if something gets<br />

trapped when the sunroof is being closed.<br />

The sunroof will stop and open slightly.<br />

Overriding the pinch protection<br />

If dirt, ice or similar create so much resistance<br />

that the pinch protection cuts in (sunroof<br />

cannot be closed), the pinch protection<br />

can be temporarily disengaged.<br />

1 Make sure the ignition is in position 3.<br />

2 Press and hold the button on the<br />

driver’s door while operating the window<br />

in question.<br />

3 Close the sunroof with the button on the<br />

roof console.<br />

The pinch protection will be operative the<br />

next time the sunroof is operated.<br />

Button for overriding the sunroof pinch<br />

protection<br />

Emergency operation of the<br />

sunroof<br />

In an emergency, such as if there is an electrical<br />

failure, the sunroof can be operated<br />

with a screwdriver.<br />

Remove the lens from the roof console. Use<br />

a screwdriver to press in the pin in the slot<br />

in the centre of the motor shaft and turn the<br />

screwdriver.<br />

Turn clockwise – closes the sunroof from its<br />

ventilation position.<br />

Turn anticlockwise – closes the sunroof<br />

from its open position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 105 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

105<br />

1 Interior lighting always off<br />

2 Interior lighting controlled by the doors<br />

3 Interior lighting on continuously<br />

Interior lighting<br />

The interior lighting consists of one front and<br />

one rear roof light, footwell lighting, and<br />

courtesy lights in the doors (certain variants<br />

only). The light switch for the interior lighting<br />

is located on the roof console by the rear<br />

view mirror.<br />

When the switch is in the mid-position (dooractivated),<br />

the interior lighting will come on:<br />

• when the car is unlocked<br />

• when any door is opened<br />

• when the remote control is removed from<br />

the ignition switch.<br />

The lighting goes out:<br />

• when the car is locked<br />

• when the ignition is turned on<br />

• approx. 20 seconds after closing all<br />

doors.<br />

The lights are dimmed out gradually.<br />

Rear lighting<br />

1 Reading lights<br />

2 Roof light<br />

If a door is left open, the light switch is in<br />

position 2 or 3 and the ignition is OFF, the<br />

interior lighting will be switched off automatically<br />

after 20 minutes to save the battery.<br />

The glove compartment lighting comes on<br />

when the compartment is opened and goes<br />

out when it is closed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 106 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

106 Interior equipment<br />

Can holder 3<br />

Sun visor with vanity mirror<br />

Sun visor<br />

An illuminated vanity mirror is provided on<br />

the inside of the sun visors. The lighting<br />

comes on when the cover is raised and goes<br />

out when it is closed.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting<br />

See page 116.<br />

Floor mats<br />

WARNING<br />

Secure the loose floor mats into the floor,<br />

otherwise they could slide forward. This is<br />

particularly important on the driver’s side<br />

as the mat could otherwise slide under<br />

the pedals and interfere with driving.<br />

Press the loose mat down over the two floor<br />

brackets. Then check that the mat is firmly<br />

secured.<br />

WARNING<br />

• The can holder should not be used to<br />

hold cups made of china or glass as<br />

these can cause personal injury in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Use only paper mugs, plastic bottles<br />

or aluminium cans.<br />

• Avoid spillage, particularly of hot<br />

drinks.<br />

• The driver should not use the can<br />

holder when driving.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 107 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Can holder between the front seats Can holder in rear seat cushion 3<br />

Interior equipment<br />

Ashtrays 3<br />

107<br />

Open the rear ashtray by gently pulling its<br />

upper edge obliquely downwards. Remove<br />

the ashtray by opening it and then lifting it<br />

straight up. Refit the ashtray by sliding<br />

straight in.<br />

You can use the electrical socket 3 in the<br />

storage compartment under the front seat<br />

armrest to charge a mobile phone, for<br />

example. There is a recess on each side of<br />

the compartment which will accept a lead so<br />

that you can close the lid without damaging<br />

the charger lead.<br />

WARNING<br />

The maximum output of the cigarette<br />

lighter socket is 240 W (20 A). The rating<br />

of the socket in the compartment between<br />

the seats is the same. Overloading can<br />

result in melting or even fire.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 108 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

108 Interior equipment<br />

Storage compartments<br />

WARNING<br />

The glove compartment must be closed<br />

while travelling. This particularly applies if<br />

the car has a passenger airbag. An open<br />

glove compartment door could cause personal<br />

injury in the event of a collision.<br />

Front ashtray 3 Rear ashtray 3<br />

Storage compartments are also available in<br />

the doors. Cars equipped with the Bose ®<br />

Centerpoint ® Surround Sound System have<br />

no compartments in the rear doors.<br />

Storage compartment between front<br />

seats


460_OM_MY09.book Page 109 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

109<br />

Open the glove compartment with the<br />

button on the left of the moulding.<br />

Sliding cover in glove compartment to<br />

admit cold air 3. This allows the storage<br />

of chocolate or the like in hot weather.<br />

Storage pocket on front edge of seat 3.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 110 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

110 Interior equipment<br />

Luggage compartment<br />

Folding down the rear seat backrest, Sedan<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never driver the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into<br />

position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the<br />

event of heavy braking or a collision.<br />

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During<br />

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage<br />

compartments can climb to 70-80 °C. Small children are very<br />

susceptible to heat stroke.<br />

• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.<br />

• Never place heavy objects on the parcel shelf. There is always<br />

a danger of loose objects being thrown forward and causing<br />

injury if the car should brake suddenly or be involved in a collision,<br />

see also page 166.<br />

• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is<br />

locked correctly on both sides. This is imperative since otherwise<br />

objects in the luggage compartment could force their way<br />

into the cabin during heavy breaking or a collision.<br />

• Adjust the head restraints for the rear seats to be occupied to<br />

a suitable height before riding in the car.<br />

• Only ride in the rear seat if the head restraints are adjusted to<br />

a suitable height in the occupied seats.<br />

• The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot<br />

during driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading<br />

the car so that children, for example, do not burn themselves.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 111 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

111<br />

For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the<br />

wide part can be folded down separately.<br />

Next to the hinges in the luggage compartment are handles for<br />

unlocking the rear seat backrests.<br />

It is easiest to fold down the rear seat backrests if the front seats are<br />

slid forward.<br />

1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle in the luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

2 Fold the backrest forward.<br />

Note: When returning the backrest to its upright position, make<br />

sure that it locks properly in place and that the seat belt does not<br />

get caught.<br />

If the left-hand backrest is not properly locked in position, the following<br />

message is displayed on the DIC (equivalent message for<br />

right-hand backrest):<br />

Rear left seat<br />

backrest unlocked.<br />

Emergency opening the narrow section of the<br />

backrest, Sedan, see page 113<br />

Load-through hatch, Sedan<br />

A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to<br />

enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.<br />

Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and<br />

apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off if<br />

a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.<br />

• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.<br />

There is a lock on the rear side of the hatch. Turn this to lock or<br />

unlock the hatch.<br />

To lock: open the hatch and lock the lock. Close the hatch. The<br />

hatch is now locked.<br />

To unlock: fold down the wide section of the backrest and unlock<br />

the lock. Alternatively, you can unlock the hatch from the luggage<br />

compartment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 112 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

112 Interior equipment<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always secure the load firmly, for<br />

example using the middle seat belt.<br />

This reduces the danger of personal<br />

injury resulting from the displacement<br />

of the load on hard braking or in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the<br />

car, as this will alter its handling characteristics,<br />

see page 236.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting<br />

The luggage compartment lighting comes<br />

on when the compartment is opened and<br />

goes out when it is closed.<br />

If the boot lid is left open, the lighting will be<br />

switched off automatically after 20 minutes<br />

to prevent the battery from running flat.<br />

Lashing eyes in luggage compartment<br />

Lashing eyes, Sedan<br />

There are lashing eyes in the luggage compartment<br />

that should be used to secure<br />

loads. In general, loads should be placed as<br />

far forward and as low down as possible in<br />

the luggage compartment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 113 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Emergency opening the narrow<br />

section of the backrest, Sedan<br />

The narrow section of the backrest can be<br />

opened in an emergency if the car is without<br />

electricity (not possible to open boot lid) and<br />

you need to access the luggage compartment<br />

for the warning triangle, for example.<br />

• Remove the cover and press the yellow<br />

lever forward.<br />

Tools and spare wheel,<br />

see page 216<br />

Cover over emergency opening lever, on<br />

parcel shelf<br />

Interior equipment<br />

Securing loads<br />

WARNING<br />

113<br />

• Put heavy loads as low down and as<br />

far forward as possible in the luggage<br />

compartment, i.e. against the back of<br />

the rear seat.<br />

• Always lash down the load so that it<br />

cannot be thrown forward during<br />

heavy braking or in the event of a collision.<br />

• Unsecured and heavy loads can raise<br />

the risk of injury during hard braking,<br />

sudden avoidance manoeuvres or a<br />

collision.<br />

• Use the lashing eyes and suitable<br />

anchorage straps 3 for optimum<br />

securing of loads.<br />

• Load the lashing eyes evenly. Never<br />

attach more than one strap to each<br />

eye.<br />

• Cover sharp edges to prevent damage<br />

to the anchorage straps.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 114 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

114 Interior equipment<br />

• If possible, avoid having the rear seat<br />

folded down when driving with a heavy<br />

load, because the anchoring possibilities<br />

are restricted when the rear seat<br />

is in this position. The rear seat must<br />

be in the upright position to protect<br />

against load displacement in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Improve protection by fastening the<br />

outer seat belts. Check that the red<br />

indicator at each opening handle is not<br />

visible. If the red indicator is visible,<br />

the backrest is not locked!<br />

• Match your speed and driving style to<br />

how the car is loaded. The handling<br />

characteristics of the car can be<br />

affected since a load in the luggage<br />

compartment will alter the car’s centre<br />

of gravity.<br />

• An object weighing 25 kg corresponds<br />

to a weight of 1,000 kg in a front-end<br />

collision at 30 mph (50 km/h).<br />

Cargo net 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the<br />

elastic breaks this may cause personal<br />

injury. Do not use a cargo net<br />

that shows signs of wear.<br />

• Never use an elastic net in the luggage<br />

compartment when the rear seat is<br />

folded down. These nets are only<br />

intended to keep light objects tidy, not<br />

for the anchoring of loads.<br />

• Secure the load in the luggage compartment<br />

firmly. Using a cargo net is<br />

not considered as load securing.<br />

• The only purpose of a cargo net is to<br />

prevent light objects from being<br />

thrown forward into the cabin during<br />

heavy breaking.<br />

• Adjust the car’s load (passengers and<br />

load) so that the gross vehicle weight<br />

and the axle load are not exceeded,<br />

see page 236.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 115 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

115<br />

Tipping the rear seat down, Wagon<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never driver the car if the backrest is not correctly locked into<br />

position as this increases the risk of personal injury in the<br />

event of heavy braking or a collision.<br />

• Never leave a child or animal unattended in the car. During<br />

sunny weather the temperature in the passenger and luggage<br />

compartments can climb to 70–80°C. Small children are very<br />

susceptible to heat stroke.<br />

• Keep hands well clear of all moving parts.<br />

• When folding the backrest back upright, make sure that it is<br />

locked correctly. This is imperative since otherwise objects in<br />

the luggage compartment could force their way into the cabin<br />

during heavy breaking or a collision.<br />

• Only ride in the rear seat if the head restraints are adjusted to<br />

a suitable height in the occupied seats.<br />

• The tail pipe of the exhaust system can become very hot<br />

during driving. Bear this in mind when loading and unloading<br />

the car so that children, for example, do not burn themselves.<br />

For greater flexibility, the rear seat is split so that the narrow and the<br />

wide part can be tipped down separately.<br />

The operation is easier if the front seats are not too far back and the<br />

rear seat head restraints are fully lowered.<br />

1 Unlock the backrest by pulling the appropriate handle forward.<br />

An unlocked backrest has a red indicator by the handle.<br />

2 Fold the backrest forward<br />

When returning the backrest to its upright position, make sure that<br />

it locks properly in place. The red indicator by the handle must not<br />

be visible. Also make sure that the seat belt does not get caught.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 116 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

116 Interior equipment<br />

WARNING<br />

• Lay heavy bags on the floor. Place smaller and lighter bags<br />

on top.<br />

• Never overload a cargo net. If the elastic breaks this may<br />

cause personal injury. Do not use a cargo net that shows signs<br />

of wear.<br />

• Secure heavy and bulky items using the lashing eyes provided<br />

in the luggage compartment. This will avert the danger<br />

of luggage flying around if the car should brake suddenly or<br />

be involved in a collision.<br />

• Secure small items if the backrest is folded down. Small items<br />

can also be thrown around inside the car and cause personal<br />

injury.<br />

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its<br />

handling characteristics (see page 236).<br />

Luggage compartment lighting<br />

On the two side trims is a light that is switched on and off when the<br />

luggage compartment is opened and closed.<br />

If the luggage compartment is left open, the lighting will be switched<br />

off automatically after 20 min. to prevent the battery from running<br />

flat.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 117 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

117<br />

Load-through hatch, Wagon<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always secure the load firmly, for example using the middle<br />

seat belt. This reduces the danger of personal injury resulting<br />

from the displacement of the load on hard braking or in the<br />

event of a collision.<br />

• Do not exceed the load capacity of the car, as this will alter its<br />

handling characteristics (see page 236).<br />

A load-through hatch is incorporated in the rear seat backrest to<br />

enable long, narrow items to be carried inside the car.<br />

Before loading or unloading long items, switch off the engine and<br />

apply the handbrake. This averts the danger of the car moving off if<br />

a long item were to knock the gear or selector lever into gear.<br />

• Fold down the armrest and open the hatch by lifting the handle.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 118 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

118 Interior equipment<br />

Lashing eyes in Wagon<br />

Lashing eyes, Wagon<br />

Lashing eyes for securing the load are provided<br />

in the luggage compartment. Place<br />

the load as far forward as possible.<br />

Driving with the bootlid open, see page 166.<br />

Load anchoring<br />

WARNING<br />

• Put heavy loads as low down and as<br />

far forward as possible in the luggage<br />

compartment, i.e. against the back of<br />

the rear seat.<br />

• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the<br />

elastic breaks this may cause personal<br />

injury. Do not use a cargo net<br />

that shows signs of wear.<br />

• Never stack loads so high that any<br />

part of the load lies above the edge of<br />

the backrest, if a load guard 3 is not<br />

being used.<br />

• Always lash down the load so that it<br />

cannot be thrown forward during<br />

heavy braking or in the event of a collision.<br />

• Unsecured and heavy loads can<br />

increase the risk of injury during hard<br />

braking, sudden avoidance manoeuvres<br />

and in the event of a collision.<br />

• For the best load anchoring, use the<br />

special lashing eyes and straps 3.<br />

• Load the lashing eyes evenly. Never<br />

attach more than one strap to each<br />

lashing eye.<br />

• Provide protection on sharp edges to<br />

prevent damage to the anchoring<br />

straps.<br />

• Never use the elastic floor net 3 and<br />

elastic side net 3 when the rear seat is<br />

folded down. These nets are only<br />

intended to keep light objects tidy, not<br />

for the anchoring of loads.<br />

• If possible, avoid having the rear seat<br />

folded down when driving with a heavy<br />

load because the anchoring possibilities<br />

are restricted when the rear seat<br />

is in this position. That the rear seat<br />

is in the upright position is a basic<br />

requirement for protection against<br />

load displacement in the event of a<br />

collision.<br />

• Improve the protection by fastening<br />

the outer seat belts. Check that the<br />

two red warning-indication flags are<br />

fully down. This shows that the backrests<br />

are locked.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 119 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Interior equipment<br />

119<br />

WARNING<br />

• Match the speed and driving style<br />

according to how the car is loaded.<br />

The driving characteristics of the car<br />

can be affected because the centre of<br />

gravity is altered when there is a load<br />

in the luggage compartment.<br />

• An object weighting 55 lbs. (25 kg)<br />

corresponds to a weight of 2000 lbs.<br />

(1000 kg) in a head on collision at<br />

30 mph (50 km/h).<br />

• Adjust the car´s load (passengers and<br />

luggage) so that the gross vehicle<br />

weight or the axle weight are not<br />

exceeded, see page 236.<br />

Cargo net 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never overload the cargo net 3. If the<br />

elastic breaks this may cause personal<br />

injury. Do not use a cargo net<br />

that shows signs of wear.<br />

• Never use an elastic net in the luggage<br />

compartment when the rear seat is<br />

folded down. These nets are only<br />

intended to keep light objects tidy, not<br />

for the anchoring of loads.<br />

• Secure the load in the luggage compartment<br />

firmly. Using a cargo net is<br />

not considered as load securing.<br />

• The only purpose of a cargo net is to<br />

prevent light objects from being<br />

thrown forward into the cabin during<br />

heavy breaking.<br />

Cargo net, vertical, Wagon<br />

Fit the net behind the rear seat backrest.<br />

1 Remove the rear cover panels in the<br />

roof.<br />

2 Fit the net’s upper fasteners into the two<br />

rear attachment points in the roof.<br />

3 Secure the net’s hooks in the two<br />

anchorage eyes closest to the rear seat.<br />

Tension the straps.<br />

The cargo net can also be fitted behind the<br />

front seats when the whole rear seat is<br />

folded.<br />

1 Remove the front cover panels in the<br />

roof.<br />

2 Snap the net’s upper fasteners into the<br />

two front attachment points in the roof.<br />

3 Lengthen the straps with the enclosed<br />

extra straps. Secure the net’s hooks in<br />

the two outer eyes furthest back on the<br />

front seats’ rails down by the floor. To<br />

locate the eyes, see page 29. Tension<br />

the straps.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 120 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

120 Interior equipment<br />

Attaching the cargo net to the roof Cargo net fitted in front anchorage eye Storing the cargo net<br />

Storage<br />

When the cargo net is not in use it should be<br />

stored in the bag supplied. Position the bag<br />

on the floor in the luggage compartment,<br />

closest to the backrest and secure it in the<br />

front anchorage eyes using the Velcro fasteners.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 121 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Cargo net, floor mounted, Wagon<br />

1 Fold up the floor. Position the edges of<br />

the floor in the slots in the side pieces.<br />

2 Fit the bag/carrier on the lower floor and<br />

secure the net’s hooks in the folded-up<br />

floor.<br />

Interior equipment<br />

121<br />

Cargo net, floor mounted, Wagon<br />

1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber<br />

bands are not twisted<br />

2 Lower anchorage point<br />

Cargo net, floor mounted, Wagon with<br />

subwoofer<br />

1 Upper bracket. Make sure that the rubber<br />

bands are not twisted<br />

2 Lower anchorage point


460_OM_MY09.book Page 122 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

122 Interior equipment<br />

Cargo guard 3, Wagon<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not place any objects on the extended<br />

cargo guard. It is designed to shield<br />

against view and not for storage.<br />

To fit<br />

1 1 Hold the cartridge so that the extendible<br />

part faces backward.<br />

2 Position the cartridge over the pin (1) on<br />

the left and right-hand sides. Press the<br />

cartridge down and rotate it slightly forward<br />

until a click is heard.<br />

3 Check the fitting by pulling the cartridge<br />

up, it should now be fitted firmly.<br />

WARNING<br />

A cassette that is incorrectly fitted can<br />

detach and cause personal injury in the<br />

event of a collision, heavy breaking or<br />

similar.<br />

Fitting the cargo guard<br />

1 Pin on which the cargo guard is fitted<br />

2 Handle for removing the cargo guard<br />

To remove<br />

1 Retract the cargo guard into the cartridge.<br />

2 Pull the handle (2) back and lift up the<br />

cartridge. Repeat this on the other side.<br />

Opening the cargo guard<br />

Opening the cargo guard<br />

The cargo guard can be opened halfway in<br />

order to facilitate loading objects into the<br />

luggage compartment (and to avoid<br />

stretching in over the luggage compartment<br />

to reach the cargo guard).<br />

1 Open the tailgate.<br />

2 Press the rear lip of the cargo guard<br />

down, e.g. with an elbow. The cargo<br />

guard now opens halfway so that<br />

objects can be more easily loaded into<br />

the luggage compartment.<br />

3 Pull the cargo guard down to the lower<br />

position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 123 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

123<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Ignition switch ________ 124<br />

Steering wheel lock____ 126<br />

Starting the engine ____ 126<br />

Important considerations<br />

for driving __________ 129<br />

Refuelling____________ 133<br />

Running-in ___________ 137<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox _______ 137<br />

Automatic<br />

transmission 3 ______ 138<br />

Cruise Control 3 ______ 144<br />

Braking______________ 146<br />

All-wheel drive (AWD) 3 148<br />

Traction Control System<br />

(TCS) ______________ 148<br />

StabiliTrak ® 3_________ 150<br />

Handbrake ___________ 152<br />

Parking ______________ 153<br />

Parking aid system 3 ___ 155<br />

Economical motoring ___ 158<br />

Driving in cold climates _ 160<br />

Driving in hot climates __ 162<br />

Towing a caravan or<br />

trailer 3 _____________ 163<br />

Driving with a roof load _ 166<br />

Driving with a load _____ 166<br />

Driving with the luggage<br />

compartment open____ 166<br />

Driving through deep<br />

water _______________ 166<br />

Towing _______________ 167<br />

Jump starting _________ 170<br />

Before long journeys ___ 172<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 124 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

124 Starting and driving<br />

Ignition switch<br />

In cars with automatic transmission, the<br />

remote control can only be removed when<br />

the selector lever is in position P.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always remove the remote control<br />

before leaving children unattended in<br />

the car.<br />

• Apply the handbrake before removing<br />

the remote control.<br />

• Never remove the remote control<br />

while the car is moving. This will activate<br />

the steering wheel lock and make<br />

it impossible to steer the car.<br />

To allow the various systems in the car time<br />

to register that the remote control has been<br />

inserted into the ignition switch, do not turn<br />

the remote control for roughly 0.5 of a<br />

second.<br />

Position 1<br />

The position lights, hazard warning lights<br />

and interior lighting can be turned on.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

Set the selector lever to position P.<br />

The selector lever is locked in position. This<br />

is the only position in which the remote control<br />

can be removed.<br />

Cars with manual gearbox<br />

The remote control can be removed regardless<br />

of the gear lever position.<br />

Position 2<br />

Parts of the electrical system are operative.<br />

Do not leave the remote control in this<br />

position since this can drain the battery<br />

in a matter of hours.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If the remote control is turned from position<br />

3 to this position before the car is stationary,<br />

it may be impossible to turn it to<br />

position 1. If this is the case, turn the<br />

remote control to position 3 until the<br />

ABS light goes out, approx. 2 seconds.<br />

Then turn it back to this position.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

The selector lever is not blocked. See also<br />

page 138.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 125 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

125<br />

Position 3<br />

The entire electrical system is operative. Do<br />

not leave the remote control in this position<br />

when the engine is not running.<br />

When you turn the remote control to this<br />

position, some indicator and warning lights<br />

will come on in the main instrument panel.<br />

These should go out after about 3 seconds.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: The heater plug<br />

function is activated if coolant temperature<br />

is below +5 °C. Start the engine once<br />

the indicator light has extinguished.<br />

Position 4<br />

The starter motor cranks (automatic transmission:<br />

selector lever must be in P or N)<br />

when the key is turned to this position.<br />

When released, the key will spring back to<br />

position 3.<br />

The car has an electronic restart lock. If the<br />

engine fails to start, the remote control must<br />

first be turned back to a position<br />

between 2 and 1 before turning it back to<br />

the start position.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 126 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

126 Starting and driving<br />

Steering wheel lock<br />

The steering wheel lock is electronic and is<br />

engaged when the remote control is withdrawn<br />

from the ignition switch. When the<br />

remote control is inserted into the ignition<br />

switch, the steering wheel lock is disengaged.<br />

A click will be heard when the<br />

steering wheel lock engages or disengages.<br />

If the car is parked with one front wheel<br />

touching the kerb, for example, you may<br />

need to turn the steering wheel slightly<br />

when you insert the remote control to allow<br />

the steering wheel lock to unlock. If you do<br />

not succeed on first attempt you must<br />

remove the remote control before trying<br />

again. Turn the steering wheel and insert<br />

the remote control into the ignition switch.<br />

If the steering wheel lock does not disengage<br />

it will not be possible to turn the remote<br />

control in the ignition switch.<br />

the following message then appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Pull out key, turn<br />

steering wheel. Restart.<br />

If there is a fault that may affect the function<br />

of the steering wheel lock, the following<br />

message will be displayed on the DIC:<br />

Steering lock malfunc.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

If the steering wheel lock malfunctions while<br />

the remote control is in the ignition switch,<br />

the lock may not engage when the remote<br />

control is removed or it may prevent the car<br />

from being restarted once the engine has<br />

been switched off.<br />

If you have to leave the car, lock the car by<br />

pressing down the lock buttons on the<br />

doors. Lock the front left door from outside<br />

with the traditional key, see page 49. The<br />

car is now locked. If the car has a car alarm,<br />

this will remain inactive.<br />

Starting the engine<br />

WARNING<br />

• When starting the engine:<br />

– Sit down in the driver’s seat.<br />

– Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the<br />

gear lever is not in the neutral position,<br />

the clutch pedal must be fully<br />

depressed or the car will jump forwards<br />

or backwards, which may<br />

cause an accident.<br />

– Never start the car from outside the<br />

vehicle, e.g. through a wound-down<br />

window. This could lead to serious<br />

personal injury.<br />

• Carbon monoxide (CO) is a colourless,<br />

odourless, noxious gas. Be<br />

aware of the danger of CO - always<br />

open the garage doors before starting<br />

the engine in a garage.<br />

• There is also a danger of CO poisoning<br />

if the exhaust system is leaking.<br />

Air may enter the lubrication system in conjunction<br />

with an oil or oil filter change. This<br />

may also happen if the car is laid up for<br />

some time.<br />

This air can cause the hydraulic tappets to<br />

emit a ticking noise, which can persist for up<br />

to 15 minutes after starting. This is quite<br />

normal and does not indicate a malfunction.<br />

It is however advisable not to exceed<br />

3000 rpm before the noise has disappeared.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 127 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

127<br />

Starting the engine<br />

Avoid racing the engine or loading it heavily<br />

before it has warmed up. Do not drive away<br />

before the warning and indicator lights have<br />

gone out.<br />

The engine has an automatic choke and<br />

should be started as follows:<br />

Cars with manual gearbox<br />

1 Make sure the handbrake is applied.<br />

2 Depress the clutch and brake pedals.<br />

Do not touch the accelerator.<br />

Note: Once the engine has started, the<br />

brake pedal will normally drop slightly.<br />

3 Start the engine. Allow the remote control<br />

to spring back once the engine has<br />

started and is running smoothly.<br />

Allow the engine to idle for about<br />

10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle for at<br />

least 3 minutes after starting.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

1 The selector lever must be in the P or<br />

N position.<br />

2 Depress the brake pedal.<br />

Note: Once the engine has started, the<br />

brake pedal will normally drop slightly.<br />

3 Start the engine. Allow the remote control<br />

to spring back once the engine has<br />

started and is running smoothly.<br />

Allow the engine to idle for about 10 seconds.<br />

Do not apply full throttle for at<br />

least 3 minutes after starting.<br />

Useful tips on starting<br />

Petrol engine<br />

If the engine has failed to start after several<br />

attempts in severe cold, proceed as follows:<br />

1 Turn the ignition witch to position 3 (it is<br />

vital that the ignition switch is turned to<br />

position 3 before the accelerator is<br />

depressed).<br />

2 Press the accelerator to the floor and run<br />

the starter motor for 5–10 seconds. This<br />

will prevent the engine from being<br />

flooded (fully depressed accelerator<br />

cuts off the fuel supply).<br />

3 Now start the engine in the normal way -<br />

do not touch the accelerator.<br />

If the engine stalls immediately after starting<br />

(e.g. if the clutch was released too quickly),<br />

do not touch the accelerator when restarting<br />

the engine.<br />

If the car has a fuel-driven parking heater 3,<br />

this will start automatically soon after the<br />

engine has been started if coolant temperature<br />

is below 84 °C. This helps the engine<br />

temperature and cabin temperature rise<br />

more quickly.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 128 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

128 Starting and driving<br />

Cars with diesel engine 3<br />

At very low temperatures, you may need to<br />

run the starter motor for up to 60 seconds.<br />

Allow the engine to idle for<br />

about 10 seconds. Do not apply full throttle<br />

for at least 2–3 minutes after starting.<br />

To facilitate starting when coolant temperature<br />

is low, and to reduce exhaust emissions,<br />

there is a preheater plug in every cylinder.<br />

The indicator light "Indicator, glow<br />

plug (cars with diesel engine)" comes on<br />

when the remote control is turned to<br />

position 3 if coolant temperature is<br />

below +5 °C, see page 67.<br />

How long the glow filament operates<br />

depends on the coolant temperature.<br />

At +4 °C it will be engaged for<br />

about 1 second, while at –20 °C it will be<br />

engaged for about 10 seconds.<br />

Starting in cold climates (diesel engines)<br />

If the car is to be used in a cold climate for<br />

an extended period of time, we recommend<br />

the use of an engine heater.<br />

At very low temperatures (below –25 °C),<br />

run the starter motor until the engine is running<br />

at about 1,000 rpm under its own<br />

power.<br />

Even if you detect the beginnings of ignition<br />

after only a few seconds, it may be necessary<br />

to run the starter motor a good deal<br />

longer to get the engine running by itself.<br />

You may need to run the starter motor for up<br />

to 60 seconds. Refer also to "Driving in cold<br />

climates" on page 160.<br />

Petrol engine designed for E85 3<br />

When the temperature is about 0 °C or<br />

lower<br />

• If possible, use the engine heater<br />

– When starting from cold between –10<br />

and –20 °C the engine heater should be<br />

engaged for about 1 hr. before starting.<br />

If the temperature is considerably lower<br />

than –20 °C then the engine heater<br />

should be engaged considerably longer<br />

before starting.<br />

– Using the engine heater at temperatures<br />

above –10 °C is good for the environment<br />

and for fuel consumption.<br />

• If the engine heater cannot be used<br />

– When the temperature is about –10 °C<br />

or lower then a greater proportion of<br />

petrol should be used to avoid the car<br />

being more difficult to start.<br />

Starting in hot weather<br />

• Start the engine in the normal way.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 129 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Important<br />

considerations for<br />

driving<br />

Cars with turbo petrol engine<br />

1 Starting and driving.<br />

• Do not use full throttle until the engine<br />

is warm, so as to avoid unnecessary<br />

wear. If the needle of the turbo gauge<br />

repeatedly enters the red zone, the<br />

engine may suddenly lose power due to<br />

the initiation of a monitoring system<br />

that limits the boost pressure. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop immediately.<br />

• Under certain barometric conditions<br />

(high outside temperature and/or high<br />

altitude) the needle may enter the first<br />

part of the red zone without necessarily<br />

indicating that a fault has arisen.<br />

• A protective function (interruption of the<br />

fuel supply) limits the engine speed.<br />

2 Stopping the engine.<br />

• Do not rev the engine immediately<br />

before switching it off - stop the engine<br />

when it is idling.<br />

3 Boost pressure regulation.<br />

• The system is optimised for RON 95,<br />

but for 2.8 V6 RON 98 is used. One of<br />

the advantages of boost pressure regulation<br />

is that the engine can also be<br />

run safely on petrol with a lower octane<br />

rating, although not lower than<br />

91 RON, without damaging the engine.<br />

However, engine performance will fall<br />

slightly and heavy loading and<br />

labouring should be avoided. For<br />

optimum performance, use the recommended<br />

grade of fuel.<br />

• The maximum boost pressure is regulated<br />

according to the tendency of the<br />

engine to knock. Short-lived knocking<br />

is perfectly normal. This can occur<br />

when the engine is running at about<br />

3000 rpm under a heavy load. The<br />

extent of this knocking will depend on<br />

the grade of fuel in the tank.<br />

• Isolated instances of knocking can<br />

occur with low-octane fuel. This controlled<br />

form of knocking, followed by a<br />

reduction in the boost pressure, is a<br />

sign that the control system is working<br />

normally, and is perfectly safe for the<br />

engine.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Starting and driving<br />

129<br />

• If the engine sounds strange there is a<br />

malfunction. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• The use of fuel with too low an octane<br />

rating can cause serious engine<br />

damage.<br />

Limited performance.<br />

The light 3 comes on in the event of an<br />

engine or gearbox fault (cars with automatic<br />

gearbox), which can cause driveability<br />

problems but does not affect exhaust emission.<br />

The car can still be driven but perhaps<br />

with limited performance.<br />

Contact a workshop when you find it suitable.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 130 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

130 Starting and driving<br />

Limp-home<br />

The engine management system has a<br />

diagnostic feature that checks a number of<br />

internal functions. If a fault is detected in the<br />

throttle valve, the engine management<br />

system will set the throttle system to the<br />

limp-home mode. This means:<br />

• idling control will be poor (uneven idling<br />

since regulated by ignition and fuel<br />

supply)<br />

• engine performance will be reduced<br />

• the cruise control will not function<br />

• the capacity of the A/C compressor will be<br />

limited.<br />

The "Engine malfunction (CHECK<br />

ENGINE)" indicator illuminates in the main<br />

instrument panel if the diagnostics function<br />

detects a fault in the engine management<br />

system. See page 63. The car should be<br />

checked by a workshop as soon as possible.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If "Engine malfunction (CHECK<br />

ENGINE)" starts to flash (indicating that<br />

the engine is seriously misfiring and there<br />

is a risk of catalytic converter damage)<br />

release the accelerator slightly. The<br />

warning light may then either go out or<br />

shine with a steady glow. If the light continues<br />

to flash despite easing off the<br />

accelerator, you may continue to drive the<br />

car. It is however recommended that you<br />

drive the car as gently as allowed by the<br />

current traffic situation. Have the car<br />

checked at a workshop as soon as possible.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Important information<br />

concerning petrol-engined cars<br />

The catalytic converter is an emission control<br />

device incorporated in the car’s exhaust<br />

system. It consists of a metal canister with a<br />

honeycomb insert, the cells of which have<br />

walls coated in a catalytic layer (precious<br />

metal alloy).<br />

NOTICE<br />

Use only unleaded petrol. Leaded petrol<br />

is detrimental to the catalyst and oxygen<br />

sensor and will seriously impair the<br />

function of the catalytic converter.<br />

To ensure that the catalytic converter continues<br />

to function properly, and also to avoid<br />

damage to the converter and its associated<br />

components, the following points must be<br />

observed:


460_OM_MY09.book Page 131 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

131<br />

• Have the car serviced regularly in accordance<br />

with the service programme.<br />

• Always be alert to any misfiring of the<br />

engine (not running on all cylinders) and<br />

any loss of power or performance. At the<br />

first sign of a malfunction, reduce speed<br />

and take the car to a workshop as soon as<br />

possible. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• If the engine fails to start (in severe cold or<br />

if the battery is flat), the car can be bump<br />

started (manual gearbox only) or started<br />

using jump leads to a donor battery. However,<br />

as soon as you have started the<br />

engine, it is important that it runs on all<br />

cylinders. If it is misfiring, allow it to idle for<br />

up to 5 minutes to give it time to settle and<br />

run smoothly. If, after this time, the engine<br />

still fails to run properly, switch off the<br />

engine to avoid serious damage to the<br />

catalytic converter. We recommend that<br />

you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

for advice.<br />

Engine management system with catalytic<br />

converter<br />

1 Engine control module<br />

2 Oxygen sensor (lambda probe)<br />

3 Catalytic converter<br />

• Never park the car in dry grass or on other<br />

combustible material. The catalytic converter<br />

gets very hot and could therefore<br />

start a fire.<br />

• Never drive off if the engine is misfiring.<br />

• If you bump start the car when the engine<br />

is already at normal working temperature,<br />

the engine must start to run on all cylinders.<br />

Abort bump starting if the engine<br />

fails to start immediately.<br />

Failure to strictly follow these instructions<br />

can result in damage to the catalytic converter<br />

and associated components, and<br />

could represent a breach of the warranty<br />

conditions.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If the car runs out of petrol, air may be<br />

drawn in with the fuel, which, in turn, can<br />

cause the catalytic converter to be damaged<br />

by overheating.<br />

WARNING<br />

If the engine is being run with the car on a<br />

rolling road or dynamometer, to ensure<br />

adequate cooling, air must be blown into<br />

the engine compartment and under the<br />

car at a rate equivalent to the ram-air<br />

effect that would obtain at the corresponding<br />

road speed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 132 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

132 Starting and driving<br />

Important information<br />

concerning diesel-engined cars<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Only use diesel fuel. Diesel engines<br />

must be run on diesel fuel that fulfils<br />

the EN590 <strong>Europe</strong>an standard. Do not<br />

use RME fuel, sometimes also called<br />

rape diesel, as this fuel will damage<br />

components in the fuel system.<br />

• Petrol in the fuel damages the fuel<br />

system. Do not drive the car if petrol<br />

has been filled by mistake. The complete<br />

fuel system must be drained and<br />

flushed with diesel fuel.<br />

• Do not use additives.<br />

• Even if the car has a fuel filter with<br />

water trap, diesel fuel that may have<br />

high water content should be avoided.<br />

High sulphur content should also be<br />

avoided.<br />

The following applies to diesel<br />

cars with particle filter 3<br />

The particle filter is a component part of the<br />

exhaust system. There are small particles in<br />

diesel exhaust fumes which are trapped in<br />

the particle filter. The filter is regenerated<br />

(the particles are combusted) at regular<br />

intervals.<br />

Regeneration occurs automatically. The<br />

time between each regeneration is affected<br />

by the type of traffic the car is driven in.<br />

Motorway driving results in the longest intervals.<br />

A regeneration can take up<br />

to 8 minutes.<br />

Regeneration starts when certain conditions<br />

are met, e.g.: the engine must have<br />

been running for at least 5 minutes (in cold<br />

weather conditions, for up to 15 minutes),<br />

the speed must be at least 25 km/h.<br />

If the car is only driven shorter distances,<br />

regeneration will not start. To prevent this,<br />

it is recommended that you drive<br />

for 20 minutes on the motorway<br />

every 1000 km. Regeneration will then be<br />

carried out.<br />

When the filter is regenerated it may seem<br />

that the engine is temporarily weaker.<br />

During town driving for example, the engine<br />

may seem sluggish during acceleration<br />

which is preceded by engine braking. This<br />

is least noticeable during highway driving.<br />

If regeneration is not activated, the following<br />

message is shown on the DIC:<br />

Particulate filter full.<br />

See Owner´s manual.<br />

Drive on the main roads for at<br />

least 20 minutes, otherwise the Check<br />

Engine light will come on when the filter is<br />

full and the car will continue to run in Limphome<br />

mode (the car can be driven but with<br />

limited performance). The car must then be<br />

checked immediately by a workshop.<br />

A manual regeneration check can then be<br />

carried out. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• When regeneration is under way the<br />

temperature in the whole exhaust<br />

system rises. For this reason, never<br />

park in a way that inflammable material<br />

may come into contact with the<br />

exhaust system.<br />

• It is important that the exhaust system<br />

is in good condition. If the exhaust<br />

system leaks then hot exhaust gases<br />

may flow against the underside of the<br />

car and cause damage.<br />

• Use a genuine <strong>Cadillac</strong> exhaust<br />

system, which is designed to withstand<br />

the temperature increase that<br />

occurs during regeneration.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 133 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Refuelling<br />

WARNING<br />

Petrol fumes are highly explosive. Bear<br />

therefore in mind:<br />

• Never smoke while refuelling.<br />

• Never use petrol for any purpose<br />

other than as fuel for your car.<br />

• Petrol is extremely flammable and can<br />

cause severe burns. No naked flames<br />

near petrol.<br />

• Do not use a mobile phone at the<br />

same time as refuelling.<br />

• If the car has a fuel-driven heater, this<br />

must be turned off for refuelling.<br />

Only use fuel grades from a well-known oil<br />

company.<br />

All <strong>Cadillac</strong> petrol engines can be driven<br />

on petrol with an octane rating between<br />

91 RON and 98 RON (RON = Research<br />

Octane Number).<br />

The engine management system monitors<br />

the combustion and automatically adapts to<br />

the fuel used.<br />

Always use the correct grade of fuel:<br />

unleaded 91–98 RON.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not overfill. Fuel should not come<br />

right up the filler pipe as room for<br />

expansion is needed for when the<br />

temperature rises.<br />

• The use of fuel with too low an octane<br />

rating can cause serious engine<br />

damage.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

133<br />

For optimum performance we recommend:<br />

• RON 95 for 4-cyl. petrol engines.<br />

• RON 98 for 2.8 V6.<br />

• E85 for cars adapted to run on E85<br />

E85 fuel must fulfil the CWA 15293 or<br />

SS 155480 standard.<br />

• Diesel fuel for diesel engines.<br />

Diesel engines must be run on diesel fuel<br />

that fulfils the EN590 <strong>Europe</strong>an standard.<br />

Sometimes, petrol can contain a number of<br />

additives containing oxygen. The most<br />

common of these are alcohol or some type<br />

of ether. The maximum oxygen level is<br />

restricted by national regulations.<br />

If fuel containing a mixture of alcohol is<br />

used, the maximum levels approved by<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> are: 5% by volume of methanol;<br />

or 10% by volume of ethanol. The most<br />

common type of ether used is MTBE<br />

(methyl-tertiary-butyl-ether), of which fuel<br />

may contain a maximum of 15% by volume.<br />

The fuel filler cap is located in the right-hand<br />

rear wing.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 134 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

134 Starting and driving<br />

Cars adapted to run on E85<br />

(85% ethanol)<br />

The fuel tank holds 61 litres.<br />

If access to E85 is limited then fuel with a different<br />

proportion of ethanol or normal<br />

RON 95 can be used for refuelling. The<br />

engine’s control management system is<br />

adjusted automatically according to the<br />

amount of ethanol in the fuel.<br />

When the temperature is about –10 °C or<br />

lower a greater proportion of petrol should<br />

be used. E85 in combination with low temperatures<br />

could lead to the car being more<br />

difficult to start. A slightly higher proportion<br />

of petrol improves the cold start properties<br />

considerably.<br />

Drive the car for at least 5 minutes after<br />

refuelling. For example, this is important<br />

when refuelling with E85 after having driven<br />

on petrol or vice versa. Driving for at least<br />

5 minutes allows the engine’s management<br />

system to reset itself for the new fuel mixture.<br />

Drive calmly during this period.<br />

During the engine’s warm-up phase<br />

(below +50 °C) engine torque is limited<br />

when driving with a proportion of ethanol.<br />

Ethanol contains less energy per litre<br />

than petrol, which is why fuel consumption<br />

increases when driving on E85 compared<br />

with petrol. A consequence of this<br />

is that a tank of E85 covers fewer<br />

kilometres than a tank of petrol.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Certain additives in petrol could, in combination<br />

with ethanol, cause reduced<br />

driveability. For this reason, refuel with a<br />

full tank of petrol (RON 95) every<br />

10 000 km. Use up the majority of this<br />

before refuelling the car again.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If a reserve fuel can is kept in the car then<br />

it should be filled with petrol, RON 95.<br />

• The engine has higher torque and output<br />

the higher the proportion of E85 that is<br />

used.<br />

• A larger proportion of E85 results in a<br />

greater requirement for the use of an<br />

engine heater in cold weather.<br />

• When the engine is cold and the proportion<br />

of E85 in the fuel tank is large<br />

(above 50%) engine torque is limited in<br />

order to avoid misfiring. The risk of misfiring<br />

is greatest if the engine is subjected<br />

to a heavy load at the same time. Torque<br />

limitation is active when the ethanol content<br />

is above 50% and engine temperature<br />

is below 50 °C at the same time.<br />

• E85 should be treated with the same<br />

caution as petrol.<br />

• E85 contains a red colouring substance.<br />

This results in the engine oil becoming<br />

slightly red.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 135 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

135<br />

Filler cap removed for refuelling<br />

Filler cap<br />

To open: The fuel filler cap is threaded. Turn<br />

the cap slowly to the left (anticlockwise).<br />

Cars adapted to run on E85 (85% ethanol):<br />

Turn the fuel filler cap a quarter turn to the<br />

left.<br />

To close: Turn the fuel filler cap to the right<br />

(clockwise) until you hear three clicks.<br />

Cars adapted to run on E85 (85% ethanol):<br />

Turn the fuel filler cap to the right (clockwise)<br />

until you hear three clicks, about a<br />

quarter of a turn.<br />

Opening the fuel filler flap manually 3, see<br />

page 60.<br />

Refuelling<br />

WARNING<br />

If the tank starts to burn while you are<br />

refuelling, do not remove the pump<br />

nozzle. Cut the fuel supply. Inform the<br />

staff. Leave the area immediately.<br />

1 Switch off the engine.<br />

2 Open the filler cap.<br />

3 Insert the fuel pump nozzle beyond the<br />

flange on the filler pipe and let the first<br />

mark (a ring, a pimple or the first springcoil)<br />

rest on the flange. Do not withdraw<br />

the nozzle while filling is in progress.<br />

4 Cease refuelling when the pump cuts<br />

out for the first time.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right<br />

up the filler pipe as room for expansion is<br />

needed for when the temperature rises.<br />

The most effective way to prevent condensation<br />

forming in the tank (and thus avoid<br />

possible running problems) is to keep the<br />

tank well filled.<br />

Refer to page 160 for information regarding<br />

carburettor spirit.<br />

Cars with diesel engine 3<br />

Only use diesel fuel intended for vehicle<br />

use. Diesel engines must be run on diesel<br />

fuel that fulfils the EN590 <strong>Europe</strong>an<br />

standard. Never use domestic fuel oil,<br />

marine diesel fuel or similar. The diesel fuel<br />

must have a cetane rating of at least 45.<br />

Fuel additives (flow improvers) and suchlike<br />

agents must not be added to the diesel fuel.<br />

Also, do not refuel from a diesel pump<br />

intended for lorries. Such pumps have an<br />

unsuitably high delivery capacity, which<br />

would cause heavy foaming and cause the<br />

pump to cut out too early.<br />

Cease refuelling when the pump cuts out for<br />

the first time.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not overfill. Fuel should not come right<br />

up the filler pipe as room for expansion is<br />

needed for when the temperature rises.<br />

In low temperatures, a paraffin precipitate<br />

may form in the diesel fuel which can cause<br />

starting difficulties.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 136 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

136 Starting and driving<br />

Water in fuel 3<br />

The fuel passes through a filter on its way<br />

from the tank to the engine. The filter traps<br />

any water in the fuel. When there is an<br />

excessive amount of water in the filter, the<br />

following message appears in DIC:<br />

Water in fuel.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Contact a workshop to have the problem<br />

remedied. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If you run out of fuel<br />

If your diesel-engined car runs out of fuel,<br />

proceed as follows:<br />

• Put in at least 5 litres of fuel. More is<br />

required if the car is on a tilt.<br />

• Start the engine as usual.<br />

• Do not touch the accelerator.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not run the starter motor for an unnecessarily<br />

long time if there is no fuel in the<br />

tank. This could otherwise damage the<br />

high-pressure pump.<br />

Filling a fuel tank<br />

WARNING<br />

Never fill a fuel can that is standing in the<br />

car. Static electricity from the can could<br />

ignite the petrol fumes. This can cause<br />

severe burns and damage to the car. To<br />

avoid this happening:<br />

• only use an approved fuel can<br />

• never fill the fuel can while it is<br />

standing in the car, in the luggage<br />

compartment or any other surface<br />

than the ground<br />

• make sure that the pump nozzle<br />

touches the can’s filler orifice before<br />

starting to fill it. Maintain contact<br />

throughout filling<br />

• do not smoke while filling.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 137 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Running-in<br />

Pistons, bores and bearings need time to<br />

bed in, to obtain uniform, wear-resistant surfaces.<br />

If a new engine is driven too hard, this<br />

gradual process of bedding-in will not be<br />

possible and the life of the engine will be<br />

shortened.<br />

Cars with petrol engine: during the first<br />

2000 km do not exceed 5000 rpm.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: during the first<br />

5000 km do not exceed 4000 rpm.<br />

In addition, refrain from driving the car at full<br />

throttle, other than for brief instances,<br />

during the first 1800 miles (3000 km).<br />

Bedding-in of new brake lining<br />

The bedding-in period for new brake lining<br />

is about 150 km if the car is driven mainly in<br />

urban traffic or about 500 km for mainly<br />

motorway driving.<br />

To avoid premature wear and shortening<br />

the life of the pads, avoid heavy braking as<br />

much as possible during this period.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox<br />

When changing gear, fully depress the<br />

clutch pedal and then release it smoothly. It<br />

is inadvisable to drive with your hand resting<br />

on the gear lever, as this can increase the<br />

wear on the gearbox.<br />

Before reverse gear (R) can be engaged,<br />

you must lift the ring underneath the gear<br />

knob.<br />

NOTICE<br />

When reverse gear is to be engaged,<br />

the car must be at a standstill with the<br />

accelerator fully released.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Gear lever, manual gearbox<br />

137


460_OM_MY09.book Page 138 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

138 Starting and driving<br />

Automatic<br />

transmission 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Depress the brake pedal when shifting<br />

the selector lever from P or N.<br />

• The car must be at a standstill before<br />

P, R or N is selected. If the car is still<br />

moving when a drive position is subsequently<br />

selected, this could cause an<br />

accident or damage the automatic<br />

transmission.<br />

• Never park the car with the selector<br />

lever in a drive position, even if the<br />

handbrake is on.<br />

• If you wish to leave the car with the<br />

engine running, move the selector<br />

lever to the P position and apply the<br />

handbrake.<br />

The automatic transmission has an electronic<br />

control module. The control module<br />

receives information including accelerator<br />

position and road speed. Using this and<br />

other information, it controls the hydraulic<br />

pressure of the transmission to ensure that<br />

gear changing is as smooth as possible.<br />

Selector lever<br />

1 Position for manual gear selection<br />

The remote control can only be removed<br />

when the selector lever is in the P position.<br />

The engine can only be started when the<br />

selector lever is in the P or N position.<br />

When the car is stationary, the engine must<br />

be idling when you move the selector lever<br />

from one position to another. If not, the<br />

transmission could be damaged.<br />

NOTICE<br />

After selecting a drive position, always<br />

wait until the gear is engaged (the car<br />

begins to pull slightly) before pressing the<br />

accelerator.<br />

Indication of gear position on main<br />

instrument panel<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock<br />

The transmission has a security function<br />

known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move<br />

the gear selector out of the P or N position,<br />

the gear selector detent (catch) must be<br />

pressed in at the same time as the brake<br />

pedal is held depressed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 139 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

139<br />

Selector lever detent<br />

The detent button on the selector lever has<br />

to be pressed in before the lever can be<br />

moved between certain positions.<br />

The brake pedal must be depressed before<br />

shifting the selector lever from P or N.<br />

Adaptive gear change patterns<br />

The adaptive gear change pattern function<br />

adapts gear changing to the prevailing<br />

driving conditions. The transmission control<br />

module senses the engine load, vehicle<br />

speed and temperature of the transmission.<br />

A suitable gear change pattern is then<br />

selected automatically to avoid unnecessary<br />

gear changes and undesired increases<br />

in transmission temperature.<br />

Certain variants use a special change pattern<br />

for the first few minutes after a cold start<br />

so that the catalytic converter reaches its<br />

working temperature more quickly.<br />

Alternatives Sentronic and SPORT,<br />

see page 143 and page 144.<br />

Thermal transmission protection<br />

of the gearbox<br />

If the temperature of the transmission fluid<br />

exceeds 150 °C, engine torque will be<br />

limited to 200 Nm.<br />

the following message then appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Gearbox too hot. Make a<br />

safe stop. Open hood.<br />

If this message appears, stop the car as<br />

soon as it is safe to do so and allow the<br />

engine to idle until the message has gone<br />

out. The selector lever should be in<br />

position P.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 140 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

140 Starting and driving<br />

Lock-up<br />

The transmission’s torque converter has a<br />

so-called lock-up function. This means that<br />

in gear, the torque converter is locked in,<br />

which reduces engine speed and fuel consumption.<br />

Kick-down<br />

When the accelerator is pressed down fully,<br />

a down change is made to optimize<br />

acceleration, e.g. for overtaking.<br />

Following this, the next higher gear will be<br />

selected at the optimum engine speed or, if<br />

you ease off the accelerator, before<br />

reaching this.<br />

Driving with a heavy load on hilly<br />

roads<br />

The transmission fluid can overheat when<br />

the gearbox is strained, for example, when<br />

driving with a caravan on hilly roads. To<br />

avoid the transmission fluid overheating,<br />

always drive with the selector lever in the<br />

D position. The adaptive gear change patterns<br />

are then active.<br />

High air temperatures or a faulty oil cooler<br />

can also cause the transmission fluid to<br />

overheat. Overheating reduces the service<br />

life of the fluid.<br />

WARNING<br />

Remember to use the braking effect of the<br />

engine (1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you<br />

are descending long or steep hills to<br />

spare the brakes.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

Towing<br />

Towing of cars with automatic transmission,<br />

see page 167.<br />

Descending hills<br />

If the speed of the car increases while<br />

descending a steep hill, despite the accelerator<br />

being released, the control module will<br />

change down. If you desire more powerful<br />

engine braking, manually select a lower<br />

gear, see page 143.<br />

Limp-home<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not tow a caravan or trailer if limphome<br />

mode is engaged.<br />

If the transmission malfunctions, the control<br />

module will activate limp-home mode.<br />

Driveability will be affected to varying<br />

degrees.<br />

the following message then appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Gearbox malfunction.<br />

Limited performance.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 141 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

141<br />

Cars with 5-speed transmission<br />

In this mode, only 2nd and 5th gears are<br />

available. Select 2nd gear when driving at<br />

low speeds and 5th gear at higher speeds.<br />

2nd gear must be selected manually. Select<br />

5th gear manually or move the selector<br />

lever to D, see page 143.<br />

Cars with 6-speed transmission 3<br />

• The car may seem totally powerless. If<br />

this is the case, have the car towed to a<br />

workshop to have the problem remedied.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• The car may seem to have greatly<br />

reduced power, but can be carefully<br />

driven to a workshop to have the problem<br />

remedied. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• Driveability may barely be affected.<br />

Regardless of how driveability is perceived,<br />

the car must be taken to a workshop to have<br />

the problem checked and remedied. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock<br />

The transmission has a security function<br />

known as Park Brake Shift Lock. To move<br />

the gear selector out of the P or N position,<br />

the gear selector detent (catch) must be<br />

pressed in at the same time as the brake<br />

pedal is held depressed.<br />

Temporary override of this function<br />

An electrical fault can prevent the gear<br />

selector being moved out of the P position.<br />

If this is the case and the car must be<br />

moved, for example to tow it a short distance,<br />

follow the instructions below:<br />

1 Apply the handbrake.<br />

2 Lift up the rubber mat in the storage<br />

compartment ahead of the selector<br />

lever.<br />

3 Under the floor of the storage compartment<br />

is a yellow plastic lever. Use a thin<br />

tool, such as a screwdriver, to press and<br />

hold the plastic lever while moving the<br />

selector lever from P to N.<br />

4 Remove the tool.<br />

5 Release the handbrake if the car is to be<br />

moved immediately, otherwise it should<br />

remain on.<br />

Check fuse 6 in the engine bay electrical<br />

centre. If the fuse is whole the battery may<br />

be flat. We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop to have the<br />

problem checked and rectified.<br />

Temporary override of Park Brake Shift<br />

Lock


460_OM_MY09.book Page 142 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

142 Starting and driving<br />

Selector positions<br />

P<br />

The selector lever is locked and the transmission<br />

is mechanically blocked.<br />

The engine can be started.<br />

To move the selector out of the P position, depress<br />

the brake pedal and press in the detent (catch) on<br />

the selector lever.<br />

Only select the park position (P) when the car is<br />

stationary.<br />

R<br />

Only select the reverse position (R) when the car<br />

stationary. The detent release button must be<br />

pressed before the selector lever can be moved<br />

to R.<br />

Wait until reverse gear has engaged before<br />

touching the accelerator.<br />

N<br />

You must press the brake pedal to move the<br />

selector lever from the neutral position (N).<br />

In neutral, the transmission is disengaged from the<br />

engine. The engine can be started but make sure<br />

the handbrake is on to prevent unexpected movement.<br />

To prevent the engine and transmission becoming<br />

hotter than necessary, select N for long stops with<br />

the engine running, e.g. when stuck in a traffic jam.<br />

At traffic lights, leave the selector lever in the drive<br />

position (D).<br />

D<br />

The drive position (D) is the normal one for forward<br />

motoring. The transmission shifts automatically<br />

between all gears, the timing of which depends on<br />

factors such as the current accelerator position<br />

and the speed of the car.<br />

Pause for a moment before applying the<br />

accelerator, to allow the gears to engage.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 143 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

143<br />

Sentronic, manual gear selection<br />

Move the selector lever to the manual position (M)<br />

(to the left position D) to select gear manually.<br />

Select a higher gear by pressing the selector lever<br />

forward or a lower gear by pulling it back. The<br />

selector lever will return to a position adjacent to<br />

the letter M after each gear change.<br />

An example of when you may wish to make<br />

manual gear changes is when overtaking, to<br />

enable you to remain in a low gear for an extended<br />

period of time.<br />

If the road surface is slippery, you may wish to pull<br />

off in 2nd or 3rd to reduce the risk of wheelspin.<br />

When descending steep hills you should select a<br />

low gear to increase the braking effect of the<br />

engine and thus spare the brakes.<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gear selections are displayed on the main instrument<br />

panel. The letter M and the current gear are displayed.<br />

When the selector lever is in the M position, as opposed to the<br />

D position, the engine is much more responsive to changes in<br />

accelerator position. The accelerator has a different feel.<br />

When changing down, the desired gear can be selected but the<br />

transmission will not change down until the engine speed is low<br />

enough to avoid overrevving.<br />

Steering wheel controls for manual gear<br />

selection 3<br />

Certain variants also have steering wheel controls for manual gear<br />

selection. On these models, it is possible to change gear manually<br />

using the selector lever and the steering wheel controls. The<br />

steering wheel controls are only active when the selector lever is in<br />

the M position.<br />

Select a higher gear by pressing the right-hand button and a lower<br />

gear by pressing the left-hand button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 144 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

144 Starting and driving<br />

Error messages<br />

If a fault occurs in the system, a fault<br />

message is shown in DIC. We recommend<br />

contacting an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.<br />

Cruise Control 3<br />

(Cruise Control system)<br />

WARNING<br />

Do not use the cruise control system in<br />

wet or icy conditions, in dense traffic or on<br />

winding roads.<br />

Location of the SPORT button<br />

Sport mode 3<br />

Sport mode is selected using the SPORT<br />

button. Gear changes in the automatic<br />

gearbox occur at higher engine speed than<br />

the normal program. Up changes occur later<br />

and down changes occur earlier at the same<br />

accelerator pedal position.<br />

Sport mode will be deselected if:<br />

• The SPORT button is pressed.<br />

• The engine is switched off.<br />

For safety reasons (brake system function),<br />

the brakes must be applied once<br />

before the cruise control system can be<br />

activated.<br />

Otherwise, the following message appears<br />

in DIC when you try to activate the Cruise<br />

Control system:<br />

Tap brakes lightly<br />

before using cruise ctrl.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 145 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Cruise control switches<br />

The system has the following functions:<br />

1 ON: engaged<br />

2 OFF: disengaged<br />

3 SET/+: sets the speed and increases<br />

the set speed<br />

4 SET/–: sets the speed and decreases<br />

the set speed<br />

5 RESUME: re-engages the system at the<br />

set speed<br />

The indicator light in the main instrument<br />

panel comes on when the switch is slid<br />

to ON. If you switch off the engine while the<br />

cruise control is ON, the system will be ON<br />

the next time the engine is started.<br />

To set the speed<br />

1 Slide the switch to ON.<br />

2 Jog the control to SET/+ or SET/– when<br />

the car has reached the desired speed<br />

(above 15 mph (25 km/h)).<br />

To increase the preset speed<br />

You can increase the speed in any of the following<br />

ways:<br />

• Accelerate to the desired speed. Jog the<br />

control to SET/+ or SET/–.<br />

• Jog the control to SET/+ to increase the<br />

speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) (when cruise<br />

control already engaged).<br />

• Hold the control in the SET/+ position until<br />

the desired speed is reached (when<br />

cruise control already engaged).<br />

To reduce the preset speed<br />

You can reduce speed in any of the following<br />

ways:<br />

• Brake to the desired speed. Jog the control<br />

to SET/+ or SET/–.<br />

• Jog the control to SET/– to reduce the<br />

speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).<br />

• Hold the control in the SET/– position until<br />

the desired speed is reached.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

145<br />

Temporary increase in speed<br />

Accelerate, without shifting down (manual<br />

gearbox), to exceed the set speed such as<br />

for overtaking. When you release the accelerator,<br />

the car will return to the set speed.<br />

To disengage the system<br />

temporarily<br />

Slide the switch to the left towards OFF, but<br />

only as far as to disengage the cruise control.<br />

Allow the switch to spring back.<br />

To re-engage the system<br />

Slide the switch to RESUME. The car will<br />

return to the previously set speed. Vehicle<br />

speed must exceed 15 mph (25 km/h).<br />

To disengage the system<br />

The system will be disengaged:<br />

• When you depress the brake or clutch<br />

pedal (cars with manual gearbox).<br />

• When the switch is slid to To disengage<br />

the system temporarily.<br />

• When the switch is slid to OFF.<br />

• When the TCS/StabiliTrak ® regulates<br />

• When position N is selected (cars with<br />

automatic transmission).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 146 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

146 Starting and driving<br />

Braking<br />

It is good practice to try your brakes periodically<br />

while driving. This is particularly<br />

important when driving in heavy rain, on<br />

roads with a lot of surface water, in snow or<br />

in salty slush. In such conditions a slight<br />

delay in the braking effect may be noticed.<br />

To minimise this delay, dry the brakes by<br />

applying them lightly now and again. This<br />

should also be done after the car has been<br />

washed, and in extremely damp weather.<br />

To avoid the brakes becoming overheated,<br />

such as when negotiating long descents<br />

with a drop of several hundred metres,<br />

select a low gear to utilise the braking effect<br />

of the engine. If the car has automatic transmission,<br />

select 1st or 2nd gear.<br />

You can help to prolong the life of the brakes<br />

by thinking ahead and braking harder over<br />

short periods, rather than braking more<br />

moderately over long stretches.<br />

WARNING<br />

The brake pressure required when the<br />

engine is off, such as when the car is on<br />

tow, is roughly four times the normal<br />

pedal force required. The pedal will feel<br />

hard and unresponsive. The steering will<br />

also be very heavy.<br />

We advise against using wheels with<br />

large ventilation slots in winter, as the<br />

brake components are then more<br />

exposed to slush, road salt and grit.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

ABS brakes<br />

WARNING<br />

No ABS system can set aside the laws of<br />

physics. The additional safety afforded by<br />

the system is not designed to allow<br />

drivers to drive faster but to make normal<br />

driving safer.<br />

In order to achieve as short a stopping<br />

distance as possible with better handling<br />

on dry, wet and slippery road surfaces,<br />

depress the brake pedal with full force,<br />

declutch and if necessary steer to<br />

safety.<br />

The Antilock Braking System (ABS) modulates<br />

the brake pressure to each wheel. The<br />

pressure is automatically reduced just<br />

before the wheel locks up and then<br />

increases again to the point at which the<br />

wheel is just about to lock. The wheel sensors<br />

send information to the brake system’s<br />

electronic control module for every decimetre<br />

that the car rolls. This information is<br />

processed continuously to ensure that the<br />

adjustment of the brake pressure will be as<br />

exact as possible. Adjustment takes place<br />

up to 12 times per second.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 147 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

147<br />

The brake system provides Electronic<br />

Brakeforce Distribution (EBD). This distributes<br />

the brake pressure between the front<br />

and rear wheels, in such a way as to achieve<br />

optimum braking performance irrespective<br />

of the car’s speed or load.<br />

The ABS has a built-in diagnostics function<br />

which will switch on the ABS warning light if<br />

a fault is detected in the system, see<br />

page 62.<br />

the following message then appears on the<br />

DIC:<br />

Antilock brake malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

The ABS system will not reduce the braking<br />

distance on loose gravel, snow or ice but,<br />

because the wheels cannot lock up,<br />

steering control is retained.<br />

When the ABS system operates you will feel<br />

the brake pedal pulsate and hear a ticking<br />

noise, both of which are perfectly normal.<br />

Apply the brake pedal with full force (you<br />

cannot press too hard), declutch and if necessary<br />

steer to safety.<br />

Braking with ABS brakes.<br />

Indication that the system is operating:<br />

pulsating brake pedal and ticking noise<br />

Do not release the brake pedal before the<br />

car has come to a halt or the danger is<br />

past!<br />

The above is critical.<br />

Braking with ABS – evasive steering<br />

If the road is slippery, the ABS system will<br />

operate even when only light pressure is<br />

applied to the brake pedal. This means that<br />

the driver can brake to test the condition of<br />

the road and adapt their driving accordingly.<br />

It is well worth practising the use of ABS<br />

brakes on a skid pan or other suitable<br />

facility.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 148 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

148 Starting and driving<br />

All-wheel drive (AWD) 3<br />

Essentially, the system consists of a PTU<br />

(Power Take off Unit), propeller shaft, RDM<br />

(Rear Drive Module which contains an electronically<br />

controlled plate clutch, final drive<br />

gear and differential) and driveshafts. This<br />

system enhances driving characteristics<br />

and stability. The system is always active<br />

and cannot be deactivated. It works<br />

together with the ESP system and the<br />

engine and transmission control modules.<br />

When driving at a constant speed, approx.<br />

95% of the torque is distributed to the front<br />

wheels and approx. 5% to the rear wheels.<br />

The torque is distributed steplessly and<br />

instantaneously between the front and rear<br />

wheels, depending on the driving conditions.<br />

If the car is fitted with eLSD (electronically<br />

controlled plate clutch between the<br />

rear wheels), the torque can also be distributed<br />

individually to the relevant rear wheel.<br />

For optimum system function, the car’s<br />

tyres should not have varying degrees of<br />

wear.<br />

When the AWD system requires service,<br />

the following message is shown on the DIC:<br />

Service XWD.<br />

When the service message is displayed,<br />

the AWD system may have limited functionality<br />

(or be completely disabled in<br />

some cases, i.e. the car switches to<br />

front-wheel drive). Contact a workshop<br />

for information. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Traction Control<br />

System (TCS)<br />

Anti-spin system<br />

WARNING<br />

The TCS system improves stability and<br />

driveability during normal driving, but it<br />

must not be regarded as an opportunity to<br />

increase the speed. The same precautions<br />

as normal for safe cornering and<br />

driving on slippery roads must be<br />

adopted.<br />

How the system works<br />

The Traction Control System (TCS) is<br />

designed to reduce wheelspin and so to<br />

give the car the best possible tractive force,<br />

together with enhanced driveability and<br />

greater stability.<br />

The TCS system uses information from the<br />

ABS system’s wheel speed sensors to<br />

determine whether any wheel is spinning. If<br />

any wheel is spinning, this is reduced on allwheel<br />

drive cars initially by changing the<br />

torque distribution, secondly by reducing<br />

the engine torque, and thirdly with the aid of<br />

the wheel brakes. On front-wheel drive cars,<br />

wheelspin is reduced initially by reducing<br />

the engine torque, and secondly with the aid<br />

of the wheel brakes.<br />

The advantages of the TCS system are<br />

most apparent when road surface friction is


460_OM_MY09.book Page 149 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

149<br />

so low that a lot of wheelspin can occur rapidly:<br />

• When the car is pulling away or accelerating<br />

with the front wheels on different<br />

surfaces (e.g. one slippery and one dry),<br />

the TCS functions like an electronic differential<br />

lock, making sure that both wheels<br />

rotate at the same speed. The system<br />

also works during reversing.<br />

• When cornering, if the inside front wheel<br />

rotates faster than the other wheels.<br />

TCS indicator<br />

When the remote control is turned to position<br />

3, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds<br />

while the system performs self-diagnosis.<br />

The indicator in the main instrument<br />

panel illuminates when TCS regulates, that<br />

is when one of the wheels has lost its grip.<br />

The fact that the TCS is operative indicates<br />

that the limit for grip has been exceeded and<br />

that the driver must exercise greater care.<br />

TCS OFF<br />

in the main instrument panel illuminates<br />

when<br />

• the system has been switched off manually,<br />

speed must be below 60 km/h.<br />

• there is a fault in the ABS system.<br />

• there is a fault in the TCS system, and<br />

at the same time the following message<br />

is shown on the DIC:<br />

Traction control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Turning the TCS off temporarily<br />

The TCS is switched on automatically when<br />

the engine is started.<br />

It may be necessary to switch off the system<br />

if the car has become bogged down, for<br />

instance.<br />

If a fault is detected in the ABS, the TCS will<br />

be switched off automatically.<br />

The cruise control system (if active) will<br />

automatically be disengaged if the TCS is<br />

operative.<br />

Disengage the system in Settings.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select TCS.<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5Select ON or OFF.<br />

End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/undo using the CLR button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 150 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

150 Starting and driving<br />

StabiliTrak ® 3<br />

Anti-skid system<br />

WARNING<br />

When driving normally, the StabiliTrak ®<br />

system improves the car’s stability. This<br />

must not, however, be regarded as a<br />

reason to maintain higher speeds. Maintain<br />

the same precautions as normal to<br />

ensure safe cornering and safe driving on<br />

slippery roads.<br />

StabiliTrak uses functions from the Anti-lock<br />

Braking System (ABS) and Traction Control<br />

System (TCS) to help the driver stabilise the<br />

car in unexpected driving situations that<br />

would otherwise be difficult to manoeuvre.<br />

The illustration shows how the system<br />

brakes one or more wheels (and with varying<br />

braking force for each wheel) in order<br />

to increase the car’s chances of following<br />

the direction in which the driver wants to<br />

drive.<br />

How the StabiliTrak ® system<br />

works<br />

StabiliTrak ® can help to prevent the car from<br />

skidding by braking one or more wheels<br />

regardless of whether the driver is<br />

depressing the brake pedal. Engine output<br />

is also choked to reduce any drive wheel<br />

spin. The car has sensors that measure<br />

wheel speed, yaw angle rate, lateral acceleration,<br />

steering wheel angle and brake<br />

pressure. Signals from these sensors are<br />

used to calculate the course of the vehicle,<br />

the driver’s intentions and whether the<br />

StabiliTrak ® system should be deployed.<br />

The course of the vehicle is compared to the<br />

course selected by the driver via the<br />

steering wheel. If these values do not<br />

match, the StabiliTrak ® function comes into<br />

action.<br />

StabiliTrak ® gives the driver a greater<br />

chance of maintaining control of the car in a<br />

critical situation.<br />

StabiliTrak ® indicator light<br />

When the remote control is turned to position<br />

3, the lamp is lit for about 4 seconds<br />

while the system performs self-diagnosis.<br />

in the main instrument panel illuminates<br />

for a brief period when the<br />

StabiliTrak ® system regulates.<br />

If the StabiliTrak ® system comes into action,<br />

The friction limit for the tyre/road surface<br />

has been exceeded. Take extra care as you<br />

continue to drive.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 151 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

151<br />

StabiliTrak ® OFF<br />

in the main instrument panel illuminates<br />

when<br />

• the system has been switched off manually,<br />

speed must be below 60 km/h.<br />

• a fault has arisen in the ABS/StabiliTrak ®<br />

system.<br />

• there is a fault in the system, and at the<br />

same time the following message is<br />

shown on the DIC:<br />

Stability control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Turning the StabiliTrak ® system<br />

off temporarily<br />

The StabiliTrak ® system is switched on<br />

automatically when the engine is started.<br />

It may be necessary to switch off the system<br />

if the car has become bogged down, for<br />

instance.<br />

The StabiliTrak ® system is always active<br />

during braking, even if it has been switched<br />

off, but if a fault arises in the ABS/StabiliTrak<br />

® system the StabiliTrak ® system is<br />

disengaged.<br />

The cruise control system 3 is disengaged<br />

when theStabiliTrak ®® system is operative.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Chassis modifications, such as change of<br />

wheels, bumper or suspension, could<br />

affect the function of the StabiliTrak ®<br />

system.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop before<br />

replacing chassis components.<br />

Disengage the system in Settings.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select ESP (StabiliTrak ® ).<br />

4 Press the SET button.<br />

5Select ON or OFF.<br />

End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/undo using the CLR button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 152 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

152 Starting and driving<br />

Handbrake<br />

WARNING<br />

• Always apply the handbrake when<br />

you park the car. If the car is to be left<br />

parked for a long time, refer to<br />

page 154.<br />

• Always apply the handbrake before<br />

removing the remote control.<br />

• Do not use the handbrake while<br />

driving.<br />

• Grasp the handbrake lever in such a<br />

way that you do not trap your fingers<br />

when you release the handbrake.<br />

Correct hold<br />

The handbrake lever is situated between<br />

the front seats. The brake acts on the rear<br />

wheels. When the handbrake is applied,<br />

the indicator light on the main instrument<br />

panel will come on.<br />

To release the handbrake, lift the lever<br />

slightly, press the pawl button on the<br />

underside of the lever and lower the lever.<br />

If conditions allow, it is best if the brake<br />

pedal is not depressed, or only depressed<br />

as little as necessary so as to stop the car<br />

rolling, when the handbrake is applied.<br />

To facilitate releasing the handbrake,<br />

depress the brake pedal. This is especially<br />

appropriate if the car is standing on a hill.<br />

If the parking brake is engaged when the car<br />

starts off, the parking brake symbol in the<br />

main instrument panel illuminates and the<br />

following message appears in DIC:<br />

Release park brake.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 153 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Parking<br />

WARNING<br />

• Never leave a child or animal in the<br />

car. In sunny weather the temperature<br />

in the passenger and luggage compartments<br />

can climb to 70–80 °C.<br />

• Park where the vehicle will not create<br />

an obstruction or a hazard to other<br />

road users.<br />

• Never park the car in dry grass or on<br />

other combustible material. The catalytic<br />

converter gets very hot and could<br />

therefore start a fire.<br />

• Apply the handbrake, remove the<br />

remote control from the ignition switch<br />

and lock the car.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Empty the car yourself and bear in mind:<br />

• never leave valuable items such as a<br />

mobile phone, camera or computer<br />

etc. visible in the car.<br />

• clothing, packages and bags attract<br />

thieves.<br />

• do not leave small objects such as<br />

CDs, sunglasses and coins visible in<br />

the car.<br />

• if possible, park in a well-lit,<br />

conspicuous parking space.<br />

• thieves strike whenever and wherever<br />

they are given the opportunity.<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Parking on a hill<br />

153<br />

When parking on a steep hill, turn the front<br />

wheels so that they will be blocked by the<br />

kerb if the car should move.<br />

If the car is parked with one front wheel<br />

touching the kerb, for example, you may<br />

need to turn the steering wheel slightly<br />

when you insert the remote control to allow<br />

the steering wheel lock to unlock.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 154 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

154 Starting and driving<br />

Laying the car up<br />

If the car is not going to be used for some<br />

time, e.g. three to four months, the following<br />

steps are recommended:<br />

• Drain the washer fluid reservoir and<br />

hoses.<br />

• Wash and wax the car. Clean the rubber<br />

seals on the bonnet, boot lid and doors,<br />

and lubricate them with glycerol<br />

(glycerine).<br />

• After washing the car, dry the brake discs<br />

to avoid corrosion by taking the car out on<br />

the road and applying the brakes a few<br />

times.<br />

• Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation<br />

forming in it.<br />

• Top up the coolant and check the antifreeze<br />

before the onset of winter.<br />

1 Downhill with kerb.<br />

Turn the wheels toward<br />

the kerb and edge the car<br />

forwards until the wheel<br />

lightly touches the kerb.<br />

2 Uphill with kerb. Turn<br />

the wheels away from the<br />

kerb and edge the car<br />

backward until the wheel<br />

lightly touches the kerb.<br />

3 Uphill or downhill<br />

without kerb. Turn the<br />

wheel towards the verge<br />

so that the car, should it<br />

move, will not roll towards<br />

the middle of the road.<br />

• Park the car in a covered, dry, well-ventilated<br />

area. Do not apply the handbrake!<br />

• If necessary, place chocks under the<br />

wheels.<br />

• Disconnect the negative (-) battery lead.<br />

If frost is likely to occur during the lay-up<br />

period, remove the battery and store it in<br />

a frost-free place.<br />

• If it is not possible to stand the car on axle<br />

stands, increase the tyre pressure<br />

to3bar (43psi).<br />

Leave all the door windows open a crack<br />

and cover the car with a non-plastic<br />

tarpaulin.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 155 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Parking aid system 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Starting and driving<br />

155<br />

Responsibility always lies with the driver<br />

when reversing.<br />

• The parking aid system can facilitate<br />

parking and reversing.<br />

• Bear in mind that small objects, such<br />

as a child lying on the ground, and/or<br />

narrow objects e.g. a post, cannot<br />

always be detected by the system.<br />

The parking aid system facilitates parking<br />

and reversing. There are four sensors in the<br />

rear bumper that detect objects up<br />

to 1.8 metres behind the car.<br />

Area monitored by the sensors seen from<br />

the side<br />

If the car is heavily laden, the system may<br />

falsely indicate that there is an object within<br />

the detection range. This is since the sensors<br />

are angled towards the ground when<br />

the car is tail-heavy.<br />

The system uses four sensors in the rear<br />

bumper. These emit ultrasound signals that<br />

bounce back to the sensors off any objects<br />

behind the car. The system, however,<br />

cannot always detect small or narrow<br />

objects, such as a post, since the reflective<br />

surface presented to the car is too small.<br />

Area monitored by the sensors seen from<br />

above<br />

The system is activated automatically when<br />

reverse is engaged. Audible confirmation is<br />

given and the following text is shown on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Parking Assistance<br />

active.<br />

If a warning message, such as the seat belt<br />

reminder, is shown on the DIC when<br />

reverse is engaged, the audible signals<br />

from the parking aid system will not be<br />

heard since the warning message has<br />

priority.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 156 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

156 Starting and driving<br />

When the sensors detect an object within<br />

the monitored area, pulses of sound (- - - - -<br />

) will be heard. The frequency of these<br />

pulses increases as the car comes closer to<br />

the object.<br />

If you stop reversing, the sound pulse will<br />

stop after 2 seconds. The sound pulses will<br />

return if you continue to reverse. If the car<br />

moves forward while reverse is engaged,<br />

the system is silenced.<br />

When the distance to the object is less<br />

than 30 cm, a continuous tone will be<br />

heard.<br />

When an object is approximately 90 cm<br />

from the car, the sound pulses change character<br />

markedly (frequency increases).<br />

A distance of about 90 cm is suitable if<br />

you wish to load or unload the luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The sensors must be kept clean to function<br />

well. Ice, snow and dirt can affect<br />

their sensitivity.<br />

Large quantities of snow or dirt covering<br />

the sensors can prevent the parking aid<br />

system from detecting any objects.<br />

Do not spray the sensors with a pressure<br />

washer, as this can damage them.<br />

Reversing alongside a wall<br />

If the distance between an object and a<br />

corner sensor does not change<br />

for 2 seconds, for example if you are<br />

reversing alongside a wall, the system will<br />

switch to monitoring straight back. The<br />

system indicates if the distance to the wall<br />

decreases again.<br />

Cars with towbar<br />

If the car has a towbar and its wiring is correctly<br />

connected to the car’s electrics, the<br />

parking aid system automatically compensates<br />

for the protrusion of the towbar.<br />

If a caravan or trailer is hitched up and the<br />

towbar wiring is correctly connected to the<br />

car’s electrics, the system is automatically<br />

deactivated.<br />

You can temporarily deactivate the parking<br />

aid system as follows:<br />

• Press the CLR button on the steering<br />

wheel once reverse gear has been<br />

engaged.<br />

The system will be reactivated the next time<br />

you engage reverse.<br />

Error messages<br />

If the system malfunctions, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Parking assistance<br />

malfunction. Service.<br />

If the system is disrupted by outside interference,<br />

the following message will be shown<br />

on the DIC:<br />

Parking assistance<br />

sensor interference.<br />

If this message appears, clean the sensors.<br />

The sensors are located in the black trim on<br />

the rear bumper.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 157 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

157<br />

The system can be switched off in Settings.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Park Assistance using the<br />

steering wheel buttons, or .<br />

4 Press the SET-button.<br />

5Select ON or OFF using the steering<br />

wheel buttons, or .<br />

6 Confirm this selection by pressing the<br />

SET button.<br />

Park Assistance<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Explanation of ON and OFF.<br />

ON<br />

The parking aid system is activated<br />

automatically when reverse is<br />

engaged. The system warns of objects<br />

behind the car.<br />

If a caravan or trailer is hitched up and<br />

correctly connected to the trailer contact,<br />

the system will be deactivated<br />

automatically. You can also deactivate<br />

the system temporarily with the CLR<br />

button if reverse has been engaged<br />

and the system is active.<br />

OFF<br />

Parking aid system deactivated.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 158 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

158 Starting and driving<br />

Economical motoring<br />

Factors affecting fuel<br />

consumption<br />

The fuel consumption of a car is greatly<br />

affected by driving conditions, climate, road<br />

conditions, speed, driving technique, and so<br />

on.<br />

Running-in<br />

Fuel consumption may be somewhat higher<br />

during the running-in period (the first<br />

3100-4350 miles/5000-7000 km) than<br />

stated values.<br />

Weather conditions<br />

Summer temperatures give better fuel<br />

economy that winter ones. The difference<br />

can be as much as about 10 per cent. Consumption<br />

increases in cold weather<br />

because the engine takes longer to reach its<br />

normal operating temperature. The transmission<br />

and wheel bearings also take<br />

longer to warm up. Even distance affects<br />

consumption: short journeys of three to<br />

five 3 to 5 miles (5-8 km) do not give the<br />

engine enough time to reach its optimum<br />

temperature. Wind conditions also have a<br />

marked effect on consumption.<br />

How to read the diagram (the following<br />

example relates to petrol-engined cars):<br />

If fuel consumption with the engine at normal<br />

temperature is 28 mpg (10 l/100 km), the<br />

actual fuel consumption 3 miles (5 km) after<br />

the engine has started from cold will be:<br />

– 23.5 mpg (12 l/100 km) at outside temp.<br />

of +20 °C (increase of 20 %).<br />

– 17.7 mpg (16 l/100 km) at outside temp.<br />

of 0 °C (increase of 60 %).<br />

– 14.1 mpg (20 l/100 km) at outside temp.<br />

of –20 °C (increase of 100 %).<br />

It is clear from the diagram that both distance<br />

driven and outside temperature have<br />

a significant impact on fuel consumption,<br />

after a cold start.<br />

If the car is normally driven on short journeys<br />

of 3 to 5 miles (5–8 km), for example<br />

to and from work, the average consumption<br />

will be 60-80 per cent above the normal<br />

level.<br />

Percentage increase in fuel consumption<br />

of engine starting from cold compared to<br />

engine at normal temperature<br />

Driving techniques<br />

• To achieve the best running economy,<br />

with regard to fuel consumption and general<br />

wear, the car must be serviced regularly.<br />

• High speed, unnecessary acceleration,<br />

frequent braking and much changing<br />

down all give higher fuel consumption.<br />

• Frequent gear changing in traffic, starting<br />

in cold weather, the use of studded tyres<br />

and roof racks, and towing a caravan all<br />

increase fuel consumption.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 159 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

159<br />

• Do not warm up the engine while the car<br />

is stationary.<br />

If idling, the engine will take much longer<br />

to reach its optimum temperature, and<br />

engine wear is at its greatest during this<br />

period. Drive off as soon as possible after<br />

starting the engine and avoid high engine<br />

speeds.<br />

• Drive as smoothly and carefully as possible.<br />

Match your driving to the prevailing<br />

traffic conditions.<br />

• Driving in a low gear gives rise to higher<br />

fuel consumption than driving in a high<br />

gear because of the higher engine speed<br />

for any given road speed. Always change<br />

up as soon as traffic conditions allow and<br />

drive in the highest gear as much as<br />

possible.<br />

• Check the tyre pressure once a month.<br />

Incorrect tyre pressure increases tyre<br />

wear. It is preferable for the tyre pressure<br />

to be slightly high than too low. Underpressure<br />

increases fuel consumption.<br />

• Check the fuel consumption regularly.<br />

Increased fuel consumption can indicate<br />

that something is wrong and that the car<br />

needs to be checked at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Practical road tests have demonstrated that<br />

substantial savings in fuel consumption can<br />

be made if the above advice is followed.<br />

WARNING<br />

Never switch off the engine while driving<br />

as the effect of the brakes and power<br />

steering will be greatly reduced.<br />

Road conditions<br />

Wet roads increase fuel consumption, as do<br />

unmade roads and driving in hilly country<br />

(the amount of fuel saved driving downhill is<br />

less than the additional amount required to<br />

climb the hill).<br />

Engine heaters 3<br />

The use of an electric engine heater is<br />

favourable for your car and the environment.<br />

Here are some of the advantages:<br />

• Lower fuel consumption.<br />

• Reduced wear on the engine.<br />

• Cabin warms up faster.<br />

• Considerably lower exhaust emissions on<br />

short journeys.<br />

The engine heater is effective at outside<br />

temperatures up to +15 – +20 °C. The<br />

warmer it is outside, the shorter the time the<br />

engine heater needs to be connected.<br />

Longer than 1.5 hours is unnecessary.<br />

If the car is equipped with a removable,<br />

electric cabin heater that is not in use, store<br />

this in the luggage compartment.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 160 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

160 Starting and driving<br />

Driving in cold climates<br />

In cold weather, special attention should be<br />

paid to the following:<br />

• Before driving off, make sure that the<br />

wiper blades have not frozen to the windscreen.<br />

• Remove any snow from the heating<br />

system air intakes between the bonnet<br />

and the windscreen.<br />

• If necessary, inject oil into the locks to prevent<br />

them from freezing. Use molybdenum-sulphide<br />

oil (MoS 2 ). If the locks<br />

freeze, exercise care when unlocking the<br />

car (manual unlocking) to avoid breaking<br />

the key. Warm up the key or use a de-icer.<br />

• It is particularly important when the roads<br />

are slippery that the brakes and tyres are<br />

in good condition.<br />

• For how to check the level of antifreeze in<br />

the engine coolant, see page 182.<br />

• Add carburettor spirit when refuelling several<br />

times before the onset of winter. This<br />

will prevent condensation water in the fuel<br />

tank from freezing and causing interruptions<br />

in the fuel supply. The likelihood of<br />

condensation is lowest when the fuel tank<br />

is full.<br />

If the car is parked outside and the temperature<br />

is below zero, carburettor spirit is<br />

of little use as it cannot remove water that<br />

has already frozen. Park the car in a warm<br />

place so that any ice that may have built<br />

up melts, then add carburettor spirit when<br />

refuelling.<br />

Condensation is caused by temperature<br />

fluctuations, either in the outside temperature<br />

alone or when the car is alternately<br />

parked outdoors and in a garage.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: Make sure that<br />

you use winter grade fuel. At very low<br />

temperatures, paraffin crystals can<br />

develop in the fuel, which can block the<br />

fuel filter and starve the engine of fuel.<br />

Park the car in a warm place so that the<br />

paraffin crystals melt. See also "Cars with<br />

diesel engine 3" on page 135.<br />

The car is equipped with tyres designed to<br />

provide optimum grip on both wet and dry<br />

roads, although this has been achieved at<br />

the expense of somewhat reduced grip on<br />

snow and ice. For regular driving on snow<br />

and ice, we therefore recommend that<br />

winter tyres be fitted. However, winter tyres<br />

achieve this extra grip at the expense of grip<br />

on bare road surfaces.<br />

Winter tyres, particularly studded tyres,<br />

generally make driving safer on snow and<br />

ice.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the legal provisions<br />

governing the use of different<br />

types of winter tyres and snow chains.<br />

Studded tyres are not allowed in some<br />

countries. If winter tyres are fitted, the<br />

same type must be fitted to all four wheels.<br />

A local workshop will be able to advise you<br />

on suitable tyres for your car. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 161 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

161<br />

Remember that tyres age: it may therefore<br />

be necessary to change winter tyres before<br />

they reach the legal wear limit, as they gradually<br />

lose their friction properties with age.<br />

If you get into a front wheel skid and the car<br />

has a manual gearbox, the best response is<br />

to freewheel, which means declutching so<br />

that the wheels neither drive nor brake, and<br />

to cautiously steer in the desired direction.<br />

If the car has automatic transmission,<br />

ease off the accelerator slightly and steer<br />

cautiously in the desired direction.<br />

If you get into a rear wheel skid, steer in the<br />

same direction as the movement of the rear<br />

of the car.<br />

Driving with snow chains 3<br />

Snow chains must only be fitted to the wheel<br />

and tyre dimensions that we recommend in<br />

"Technical data" on page 235.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop regarding approved<br />

snow chains.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Do not drive at speeds above 30 mph<br />

(50 km/h) when snow chains are<br />

fitted.<br />

• Snow chains can reduce directional<br />

stability.<br />

• Do not fit snow chains to the car’s rear<br />

wheels.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Check the links frequently for wear.<br />

• Check that the chains do not foul the<br />

wheel arch liner at full lock.<br />

• Refer to the "Technical data" section<br />

on page 235, for information on wheel<br />

and tyre dimensions approved for the<br />

fitting of snow chains.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 162 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

162 Starting and driving<br />

Driving in hot climates<br />

Always check the coolant level before<br />

starting a journey. When the engine is cold,<br />

the coolant level must be on or just above<br />

the KALT/COLD mark (boundary between<br />

the upper and lower sections of the tank).<br />

At the end of a journey, allow the engine to<br />

idle for 2–3 minutes before switching it off.<br />

If the needle on the temperature gauge<br />

enters the red zone, the following message<br />

will be shown on the DIC:<br />

Hot engine. Make a<br />

safe stop. Idle engine.<br />

1 Stop the car but do not switch off the<br />

engine. Do not remove the cap on the<br />

cooling system expansion tank, even if<br />

the tank is empty. The engine temperature<br />

should decrease. If the temperature<br />

continues to rise with the engine idling,<br />

the engine must be switched off.<br />

2 If the engine is idling and the needle on<br />

the temperature gauge falls, wait until a<br />

normal temperature is shown (about in<br />

the middle of the scale) before switching<br />

off the engine. If the coolant needs to be<br />

topped up, carefully unscrew the<br />

expansion tank cap.<br />

Fill as required with a mixture of 50 %<br />

antifreeze and 50 % clean water. Use an<br />

antifreeze approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Exercise care when opening the<br />

bonnet if the engine is overheated.<br />

Never remove the expansion tank cap<br />

completely when the engine is hot.<br />

• The cooling system is pressurised - hot<br />

coolant and vapour can escape. These<br />

can cause injury to your eyes and<br />

burns. Open the cap slowly to release<br />

the pressure before removing it.<br />

3 Have the car’s cooling system checked<br />

at a workshop. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Cars with diesel engine: The engine<br />

has a protective function that prevents it<br />

from overheating. The engine output is<br />

reduced when the engine temperature is<br />

so high that the needle enters the red<br />

zone.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 163 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Towing a caravan or<br />

trailer 3<br />

WARNING<br />

• Do not drive with a caravan or trailer<br />

on inclines steeper than 15 %. The<br />

load on the drive (front) wheels will be<br />

so low that the wheels can start to spin<br />

and prevent further progress.<br />

• In addition, the car’s handbrake may<br />

not always be sufficient to hold the car<br />

and caravan securely, as the wheels<br />

may start to slide.<br />

• Always apply the trailer’s or caravan’s<br />

parking brake when unhitching it. Otherwise,<br />

there is a risk of personal injury<br />

or damage to the bumper should the<br />

caravan or trailer start to roll.<br />

Make sure you are familiar with the legal<br />

requirements regarding speed limits for<br />

towing, maximum caravan weights,<br />

caravan braking requirements, and also<br />

any special driving licence provisions.<br />

Towbar 3<br />

A towbar is available as an option. It is<br />

designed for a trailer weight of<br />

max. 1600 kg.<br />

An electrical connection 3 for the towbar<br />

and an electrical unit are provided in the<br />

electrical centre on the left-hand side of the<br />

luggage compartment.<br />

If the car has a 13-pin <strong>Cadillac</strong> genuine electrical<br />

socket then it is possible to supply a<br />

trailer/caravan with rear fog lights and<br />

reversing lights. The caravan can also have<br />

interior and exterior lighting even when the<br />

car’s ignition is switched off. In which case,<br />

remember not to load the battery for too<br />

long so that it is discharged and prevents<br />

the car from starting.<br />

There is also access to power in the caravan<br />

during a journey, the caravan battery can be<br />

charged for example.<br />

An adapter is required to connect a caravan<br />

or trailer with 7-pin connector 3.<br />

If the car has the parking aid system, this is<br />

deactivated automatically if a caravan or<br />

trailer is hitched up and connected to the<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> genuine trailer socket.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Starting and driving<br />

163<br />

• Only use a towbar that has been<br />

approved for your car. We recommend<br />

that you entrust towbar installation<br />

to an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop,<br />

which can also provide<br />

important information such as trailer<br />

weight. Your authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop has information on how the<br />

towbar is to be installed and whether<br />

other measures must be undertaken<br />

that could affect the cooling system or<br />

other equipment.<br />

• We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for<br />

advice on which towbar is designed for<br />

your car as well as for connecting a<br />

towbar.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 164 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

164 Starting and driving<br />

• If the caravan or trailer has additional<br />

electrical equipment, besides the<br />

standard exterior lighting (e.g. interior<br />

lighting, a fan or a charger for a separate<br />

battery) and it is connected to the<br />

car via the trailer contact, to be provided<br />

with a separate power supply,<br />

the caravan or trailer must have a<br />

13-pin connector as specified in<br />

ISO 11446.<br />

• Exercise care when driving on uneven<br />

roads or against the kerb if the car is<br />

heavily laden or when towing a caravan<br />

or trailer. This particularly<br />

applies to cars with 18" wheels.<br />

Recommendations for cars with<br />

automatic transmission<br />

The following driving time limits are based<br />

on the capacity of the cooling system in hot<br />

weather, i.e. approximately +30 °C.<br />

Gradient of<br />

hill, %<br />

Max. caravan<br />

weight, kg<br />

Time limit,<br />

minutes<br />

6–8 1500 unlimited<br />

9–11 1400 max 15<br />

12–14 1200 max 15<br />

max. 15 1000 max 15<br />

When negotiating long hills, bear the following<br />

important considerations in mind.<br />

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated<br />

by the temperature gauge in the main instrument<br />

panel.<br />

The following steps are taken in order as the<br />

temperature of the transmission increases:<br />

• Gear change pattern is altered<br />

• A/C compressor is switched off<br />

• Max. engine torque is reduced


460_OM_MY09.book Page 165 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

165<br />

The following message will be displayed on<br />

the DIC if the transmission fluid becomes<br />

too hot:<br />

Gearbox too hot. Make a<br />

safe stop. Open hood.<br />

If this message appears, stop the car as<br />

soon as it is safe to do so and allow the<br />

engine to idle until the message has gone<br />

out. The selector lever should be in<br />

position P.<br />

When continuing your journey, manually<br />

select a low gear in which the engine speed<br />

is about 3500 rpm until the incline eases,<br />

see page 143.<br />

WARNING<br />

Utilise the braking effect of the engine<br />

(gear M1, M2 or M3) when you are<br />

descending long or steep hills to spare<br />

the brakes.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

Recommendations for cars with<br />

manual gearbox<br />

Rises in coolant temperature are indicated<br />

by the temperature gauge in the main instrument<br />

panel.<br />

When the needle is just outside the red<br />

zone, the A/C compressor will be switched<br />

off and, on certain engine variants, the maximum<br />

engine torque will be limited.<br />

When continuing your journey, select a<br />

low gear in which the engine speed is<br />

about 3500 rpm until the incline eases.<br />

WARNING<br />

Utilise the braking effect of the engine<br />

(1st, 2nd or 3rd gear) when you are<br />

descending long or steep hills to spare<br />

the brakes.<br />

Overheating can cause the brakes to<br />

fade!<br />

Towbar load<br />

The weight distribution on the caravan<br />

makes a lot of difference to the handling<br />

properties of the car and caravan combination.<br />

As regards two-wheel caravans, concentrate<br />

the load over the wheels and keep<br />

it as low as possible.<br />

Distribution of load in caravan<br />

aLight<br />

b Moderate<br />

c Heavy<br />

The caravan should be loaded so that the<br />

load on the towball is 50–75 kg. Note that<br />

this load must be included in the total load<br />

for the car. If this now exceeds the specified<br />

load capacity, the load in the luggage compartment<br />

may have to be reduced by the<br />

corresponding amount.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 166 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

166 Starting and driving<br />

Driving with a roof load<br />

WARNING<br />

• A roof load will affect the car’s centre<br />

of gravity and aerodynamics. Be<br />

aware of this when cornering and<br />

driving in crosswinds.<br />

• Suit your speed to the prevailing<br />

conditions.<br />

The maximum permissible roof load<br />

is 100 kg. Note that the roof load must be<br />

included in the car’s maximum permissible<br />

payload and axle load.<br />

Strong, sturdy roof carriers 3 designed specially<br />

for your car are available. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> dealer. Always fasten roof loads<br />

securely.<br />

Driving with a load<br />

The handling characteristics are affected by<br />

how the car is loaded.<br />

• Place the heaviest load as far forward and<br />

as low as possible in the luggage compartment.<br />

• Secure the load to the lashing eyes, see<br />

page 112.<br />

• Heavy loads mean that the car’s centre of<br />

gravity is further back. As a result, the car<br />

will sway more during evasive steering.<br />

• Never exceed the permissible load of the<br />

roof box 3 even if there is room for more.<br />

• Ensure that the tyre pressure is correct –<br />

slight overinflation is preferable to underinflation.<br />

See also page 210 and 245.<br />

• The braking distance of a loaded car is<br />

always greater. Keep your distance from<br />

the vehicle in front.<br />

• Do not exceed the car’s permissible gross<br />

vehicle weight or axle load, see page 236.<br />

• Roof loads can negatively affect<br />

telecommunication.<br />

Driving with the luggage<br />

compartment open<br />

Avoid driving with the boot lid partly or fully<br />

open, since exhaust fumes can be drawn<br />

into the cabin.<br />

If you must drive with the boot lid open,<br />

close all windows and the sunroof (if fitted)<br />

and set the cabin fan to its highest speed<br />

setting.<br />

Driving through deep<br />

water<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not drive through puddles or water<br />

deeper than 20 cm and do not drive faster<br />

than at idling speed. Water can otherwise<br />

be drawn into the engine. The engine will<br />

be damaged if water enters the intake<br />

system.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 167 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Towing<br />

Front towing eye<br />

Starting and driving<br />

167<br />

WARNING<br />

• Remember that the brake servo does<br />

not operate when the engine is off.<br />

Much greater pressure than normal<br />

will therefore be required to operate<br />

the brake pedal.<br />

• Nor does the steering servo operate<br />

when the engine is off. The steering<br />

will therefore be much heavier than<br />

usual.<br />

• The towing vehicle should always be<br />

heavier than the vehicle on tow.<br />

• Never allow passengers to ride in the<br />

car when it is on tow.<br />

• Always seek professional help if the<br />

car needs to be recovered.<br />

• The ignition switch must be in<br />

position 3 if the car is moved with the<br />

engine not running.<br />

• The steering wheel lock must be disengaged<br />

before towing the car.<br />

• The steering wheel lock disengages<br />

when the remote control is inserted<br />

into the ignition switch, if the car battery<br />

has sufficient charge.<br />

WARNING<br />

• Make sure that the towing eye is<br />

screwed in tightly. It has a left-hand<br />

thread!<br />

• The towing eye is only designed for<br />

towing the car on roads. It must not be<br />

used to pull the car out of a ditch, for<br />

example.<br />

• Make sure that all bystanders keep a<br />

suitable distance, in case the towing<br />

eye or tow rope should snap. The<br />

towing eye or tow rope could catapult<br />

off and cause seriously injury.<br />

• Never drive with the towing eye fitted<br />

to the front bumper. Return it to its<br />

designated storage space.<br />

Front towing eye.<br />

The towing eye has a left-hand thread!<br />

The front towing eye is stowed by the spare<br />

wheel. On the right-hand side of the bumper<br />

is a cover concealing the attachment point<br />

(tapped hole) for the towing eye.<br />

1 Press the knob on the upper section of<br />

this cover at the same time as pulling out<br />

the lower edge.<br />

2 Screw in the towing eye. The towing<br />

eye has a left-hand thread!<br />

3 Insert the wheel wrench into the eye to<br />

tighten it properly.<br />

To refit the cover: Start by inserting the top<br />

edge of the cover. Then click in the lower<br />

edge, one corner at a time.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 168 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

168 Starting and driving<br />

Rear towing eye<br />

Rear towing eye<br />

The car has a permanent towing eye at the<br />

rear under the bumper.<br />

If the car is equipped with a towbar, this can<br />

be used instead of the towing eye.<br />

Towing the car<br />

Cars with manual gearbox<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Never use the towing eyes to pull the<br />

car unstuck<br />

• Release the handbrake if the car is to<br />

be towed on its rear wheels.<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> <strong>BLS</strong> AWD with manual gearbox:<br />

If the car is towed with all four wheels on<br />

the ground then there are no technical<br />

limitations for speed and distance.<br />

If both front wheels or both rear wheels<br />

have been raised, and if the law permits,<br />

the maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.<br />

There are no limitations as to the distance<br />

over which the car can be towed.<br />

Set the gear lever in neutral position. Switch<br />

on the position light.<br />

The national regulations on towing<br />

speeds must be followed.<br />

Always try to keep the towrope taut by<br />

gently applying the brake of the car on tow,<br />

as necessary. This will avoid the towrope<br />

being jerked violently.<br />

Cars with automatic transmission<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not tow the car backwards.<br />

• Release the handbrake if the car is to<br />

be towed on its rear wheels.<br />

•Do not tow the car backwards.<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> <strong>BLS</strong> AWD with automatic transmission:<br />

If the car is towed with all four wheels on<br />

the ground then it may be towed at a<br />

maximum speed of 50 km/h and for a<br />

maximum of 50 km.<br />

If both front wheels have been raised, and<br />

if the law permits, the car may be towed at<br />

a maximum speed of 50 km/h. There are<br />

no technical limitations as to the distance<br />

over which the car can be towed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 169 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Set the selector lever in the N position.<br />

Switch on the position light.<br />

The national regulations on towing<br />

speeds must be followed.<br />

Always try to keep the towrope taut by<br />

gently applying the brake of the car on tow,<br />

as necessary. This will avoid the towrope<br />

being jerked violently.<br />

If the law permits, the maximum permitted<br />

towing speed is 50 km/h. The maximum<br />

permitted towing distance is 50 km. If the<br />

car needs to be transported further than this<br />

then a breakdown truck must be sent for.<br />

The engine cannot be started by towing or<br />

pushing the car. In an emergency, the<br />

engine can be started as described under<br />

"Jump starting" on page 170.<br />

Never use the towing eyes to pull the car<br />

unstuck<br />

Starting and driving<br />

Vehicle recovery<br />

169<br />

If the car has to be transported on a<br />

recovery vehicle or similar, it must be<br />

securely strapped down. There are attachment<br />

points for this purpose on the underside<br />

of the car. The attachment points are<br />

oblong hole that have been reinforced to<br />

cope with the stresses that arise during this<br />

type of transport.<br />

Transporting the car<br />

NOTICE<br />

If a car with sport (lowered) chassis is<br />

transported, for example on a breakdown<br />

truck, take extra care not to damage the<br />

spoiler and undercarriage.<br />

Attachment points for anchorage straps


460_OM_MY09.book Page 170 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

170 Starting and driving<br />

Driving with the<br />

compact spare wheel<br />

See page 216.<br />

Tyre repair kit 3<br />

On certain markets, the spare wheel has<br />

been replaced by a tyre repair kit. Using this<br />

repair kit, the punctured tyre can be inflated<br />

without having to remove the wheel.<br />

See page 223.<br />

Jump starting<br />

WARNING<br />

• When working on the battery, highly<br />

explosive gas can build up. A spark<br />

could ignite this gas that collects<br />

around the battery. Therefore, always<br />

avoid sparks and naked flames in the<br />

vicinity of the battery.<br />

• The battery contains corrosive sulphuric<br />

acid. Always wear a face mask<br />

or goggles when working on the<br />

battery.<br />

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or<br />

splashes onto skin or clothing, wash<br />

the affected area with liberal amounts<br />

of water. If acid gets into the eyes or a<br />

large quantity makes contact with the<br />

skin, seek medical help.<br />

Jump starting<br />

It is essential when a donor battery is to be<br />

used to jump start the car that the jump<br />

leads be connected correctly to prevent<br />

arcing.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The cross sectional area of the jump<br />

leads must be at least 16 mm 2 for petrolengined<br />

cars and 25 mm 2 for dieselengined<br />

cars.<br />

The leads must not be more<br />

than 3 metres long.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 171 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Starting and driving<br />

171<br />

1 Switch off the ignition and all currentconsuming<br />

devices (lighting, rear<br />

window heating, etc.).<br />

2 Switch off the donor car’s engine.<br />

3 Start by connecting the positive (+) terminal<br />

of the donor battery to the positive<br />

terminal on the flat battery.<br />

4 Next, connect the negative (-) terminal<br />

of the donor battery to the negative (-)<br />

terminal of the flat battery.<br />

5 Start the engine of the donor car.<br />

6 Now start the engine of the host car.<br />

Allow the engine to run for a while and<br />

then disconnect the donor battery in the<br />

reverse order.<br />

Note. If the voltage of the flat battery is<br />

very low, it may be necessary to have<br />

jump leads connected for several minutes<br />

before starting the car with the flat<br />

battery.<br />

If the starter motor does not turn over at first<br />

try, wait 3–5 minutes before trying again.<br />

Charging the battery 3/jump<br />

starting<br />

To avoid damaging the car’s electrical<br />

system and electronics, the following rules<br />

must be followed when charging the battery<br />

or jump starting the car.<br />

• If the charger or starter unit can be set to<br />

different voltages (6V/12V/18V/24V), 12V<br />

must be selected.<br />

• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions<br />

supplied with the charger or starter unit.<br />

• No other apparatus that are grounded or<br />

connected to the mains must be connected<br />

to the car during charging or jump<br />

starting.<br />

• The charger or starter unit must under no<br />

conditions produce a voltage greater<br />

than:<br />

• 16V continuous<br />

• 18V for 60 minutes.<br />

• If you are unsure about the charge rating<br />

of the unit, disconnect the battery clamp<br />

from the positive terminal before<br />

connecting the unit to the battery.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 172 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

172 Starting and driving<br />

Before long journeys<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> has a brochure containing the<br />

address of authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> servicing<br />

workshops throughout <strong>Europe</strong>. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Before setting off on a long journey, it is<br />

advisable to have the car checked over at a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Make sure that you have essential spares<br />

with you on your journey, such as bulbs,<br />

fuses, wiper blades and a drive belt<br />

(poly-V-belt).<br />

There are a number of items you can check<br />

yourself before the journey:<br />

• Check that oil or fuel does not leak from<br />

the engine or gearbox.<br />

• Check the poly-V-belt (drive belt). Have it<br />

replaced if it shows any signs of wear.<br />

• Check the battery charge.<br />

• Check the tread and pressure of all tyres,<br />

including the spare wheel. Refer to<br />

page 245 for tyre pressures.<br />

• Take along an extra remote control. Carry<br />

this separately.<br />

• Check the speed rating on the tyres to<br />

ensure that you do not exceed the maximum<br />

permitted speed for the tyres if<br />

motoring on derestricted roads. Refer to<br />

"Tyre markings" on page 211.<br />

• Check the brakes.<br />

• Check all lights and bulbs.<br />

• Check the tool kit.<br />

• Wintertime: check whether studded tyres<br />

are allowed in the country to which you<br />

are travelling.<br />

• Make sure you are carrying a warning triangle.<br />

Acquaint yourself with the regulations<br />

that apply to its use in the county to<br />

which you are travelling.<br />

Turn the height adjuster screw 3 turns<br />

anticlockwise to adjust the light beam<br />

downwards if you are switching from righthand<br />

traffic to left-hand traffic or<br />

vice versa.<br />

This is most suitable done with a 6 mm<br />

hex socket wrench.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 173 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

173<br />

Car care<br />

Bonnet ______________ 174<br />

Engine ______________ 175<br />

Turbo petrol engine,<br />

4-cyl _______________ 176<br />

Diesel engine 3 _______ 178<br />

Engine oil ____________ 180<br />

Air filter______________ 181<br />

Transmission fluid ____ 181<br />

Coolant______________ 182<br />

Brake/clutch fluid and<br />

braking lining _______ 184<br />

Power steering________ 185<br />

Battery ______________ 186<br />

Drive belt ____________ 188<br />

Wipers and washers ___ 188<br />

Wiper blades _________ 188<br />

Changing bulbs _______ 190<br />

Fuses ________________ 204<br />

Wheels _______________ 210<br />

Spare wheel ___________ 216<br />

Changing wheels ______ 219<br />

Seatbelts _____________ 227<br />

Upholstery ____________ 228<br />

Textile carpeting _______ 228<br />

Engine bay____________ 230<br />

Washing______________ 228<br />

Waxing and polishing ___ 230<br />

Touching up paintwork__ 230<br />

Anti-corrosion treatment 231<br />

Service programme ____ 232<br />

Materials used in the<br />

car: reclamation ______ 232<br />

Air conditioning (A/C) ___ 233<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 174 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

174 Car care<br />

Bonnet<br />

The bonnet lock handle is located under the<br />

fascia on the driver’s side. Open the bonnet<br />

as follows:<br />

1 Pull the release handle.<br />

2 The bonnet opens to the half-locked<br />

position, being arrested by a catch at the<br />

front edge.<br />

3 Press the catch plate upwards and raise<br />

the bonnet.<br />

When closing the bonnet, drop it from a<br />

height of about 30 cm, without pushing it<br />

down.<br />

Bonnet lock handle<br />

Bonnet release catch plate


460_OM_MY09.book Page 175 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Engine<br />

Turbo petrol engine, 4-cyl<br />

The engine is a transverse, four-cylinder,<br />

in-line engine with dual overhead camshaft<br />

and 16 valves. The engine block and cylinder<br />

head are made of aluminium.<br />

The engine is equipped with two balancer<br />

shafts that reduce engine vibrations to a<br />

minimum.<br />

The balance shafts are chain driven and<br />

rotate at twice the speed of the crankshaft.<br />

They produce forces and torques that are<br />

opposed to those generated by the pistons<br />

and connecting rods, an effect that occurs<br />

twice for each revolution of the engine.<br />

Engine noise is therefore also reduced as<br />

the counter-rotating shafts counteract the<br />

vibration from the moving parts of the<br />

engine.<br />

The gearbox, located on the left-hand side<br />

of the engine, is integrated with the engine.<br />

Turbo petrol engine, V6 3<br />

The V6 engine is a turbo charged V6<br />

engine. The engine block and cylinder head<br />

are made of aluminium with 60° between<br />

the cylinder banks, 4 valves per cylinder and<br />

2 camshafts per bank.<br />

The camshafts are driven via a chain transmission.<br />

The engine is equipped with a<br />

turbo whose turbine collects exhaust pressure<br />

from both banks of cylinders.<br />

To obtain optimum performance, fuel consumption<br />

and low emission levels the<br />

engine is equipped with CVCP (Continuous<br />

Variable Cam Phasing). This means that<br />

the engine’s intake camshafts can be<br />

adjusted to achieve optimum functionality.<br />

The switches are hydraulic.<br />

Diesel engine 3<br />

Car care<br />

175<br />

The diesel engine is a transverse, fourcylinder,<br />

in-line engine. The engine has<br />

16 valves and dual overhead camshafts.<br />

The gearbox, located on the left-hand side<br />

of the engine, is integrated with the engine.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 176 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

176 Car care<br />

Turbo petrol engine, 4-cyl<br />

1 Oil filler cap<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 177 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Turbo petrol engine, V6 3<br />

Car care<br />

177<br />

1 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Oil filler cap<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 178 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

178 Car care<br />

Diesel engine, TiD 3<br />

1 Oil filler cap<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 179 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Diesel engine, TTiD 3<br />

Car care<br />

179<br />

1 Oil filler cap<br />

2 Coolant expansion tank<br />

3 Brake and clutch fluid reservoir<br />

4Battery<br />

5 Fuses<br />

6 Washer fluid reservoir<br />

7 Power steering fluid reservoir<br />

8 Engine oil dipstick


460_OM_MY09.book Page 180 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

180 Car care<br />

Engine oil<br />

Checking the engine oil<br />

Check the engine oil level regularly.<br />

1 Park the car on a level surface.<br />

2 Switch off the engine and wait for<br />

2–5 minutes (diesel engine: 5 min.).<br />

The engine should be at normal<br />

operating temperature.<br />

3 Withdraw the dipstick and wipe it with a<br />

clean rag before checking the oil level.<br />

The oil level must not be below the MIN<br />

mark on the dipstick, but nor should it be<br />

above the MAX mark, since this could result<br />

in abnormal oil consumption.<br />

The distance between the MIN and MAX<br />

marks is equivalent to 1.0 l.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Too high an oil level can damage the<br />

engine.<br />

2.0 Turbo (210 hp):<br />

When the engine is started, the engine oil<br />

level is checked. If the level is too low, the<br />

following message appears on the DIC:<br />

Checkoil level.<br />

If this occurs the oil level must be checked<br />

first. If the level is too low then it must be<br />

topped up.<br />

1.9TiD and 1.9 TTiD:<br />

The engine is equipped with an engine oil<br />

level sensor that is active when the engine<br />

is running. If the level sinks too low, the following<br />

message appears on the DIC:<br />

Checkoil level.<br />

If this occurs the oil level must be checked<br />

first. If the level is too low then it must be<br />

topped up.<br />

Oil filler cap and dipstick, turbo petrol<br />

engine, 4-cyl


460_OM_MY09.book Page 181 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Air filter<br />

Car care<br />

181<br />

WARNING<br />

To ensure reliable operation, only use an<br />

air filter recommended by <strong>Cadillac</strong> when<br />

changing. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Oil filler cap and dipstick, turbo petrol<br />

engine, V6<br />

Recommended oil grade, see car’s<br />

Service Book.<br />

Make sure you screw on the oil filler cap<br />

properly after topping up the oil to avoid running<br />

problems.<br />

It is normal for a certain amount of oil to be<br />

consumed. It is therefore often necessary to<br />

top up the oil between services. Check the<br />

engine oil level regularly.<br />

While running in (approx. 3,100 miles<br />

or 5,000 km) and when driving at high<br />

speeds or with a caravan, the oil consumption<br />

may be higher than normal.<br />

Oil filler cap and dipstick, diesel engine<br />

Transmission fluid<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox<br />

The transmission fluid should be changed in<br />

accordance with the Service Programme.<br />

Automatic transmission<br />

The transmission fluid should be changed in<br />

accordance with the Service Programme.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 182 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

182 Car care<br />

Coolant<br />

WARNING<br />

• Be careful when opening the bonnet if<br />

the engine is overheated. Never undo<br />

the expansion tank cap fully while the<br />

coolant is hot.<br />

• The cooling system is pressurised.<br />

This can cause hot coolant and vapour<br />

can escape causing injury to your<br />

eyes and burns.<br />

• Exercise care when adding glycol.<br />

Glycol on hot surfaces constitutes a<br />

fire risk.<br />

There is an overpressure in the cooling<br />

system. Coolant temperatures can sometimes<br />

exceed 100 °C.<br />

If the level of coolant in the expansion tank<br />

drops too low, the following message<br />

appears on the DIC:<br />

Coolant level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

The properties of the coolant are retained<br />

for the entire service life of the car. Therefore,<br />

it is not necessary to change the<br />

coolant.<br />

The coolant contains 45 % antifreeze and<br />

anti-corrosion fluid. This ratio gives the best<br />

cooling effect. Lower concentrations should<br />

be avoided, in view of the corrosion risk.<br />

Coolants of a different brand could damage<br />

the engine or cooling system. We therefore<br />

recommend strict use of coolants that have<br />

been approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

If the expansion tank is empty when coolant<br />

is added, run the engine until warm so that<br />

the thermostat opens. Top up the tank<br />

again, as necessary.<br />

NOTICE<br />

If coolant requires filling, first blend equal<br />

parts coolant and tap water or distilled<br />

water.<br />

If straight coolant is added, the engine<br />

could still freeze and be damaged. This is<br />

because the concentrated coolant will not<br />

mix properly with the coolant until the<br />

thermostat has opened to allow full circulation.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 183 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

183<br />

Cooling system expansion tank, turbo<br />

petrol engine, 4-cyl<br />

Cars with 4-cyl. engine: The expansion<br />

tank is transparent to facilitate checking the<br />

coolant level.<br />

When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie<br />

on or just above the KALT/COLD mark on<br />

the expansion tank (boundary between the<br />

upper and lower sections of the tank, see<br />

illustration).<br />

Top up with a mixture of equal parts of<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong>-approved concentrated coolant<br />

and clean water. We recommend that you<br />

contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Cooling system expansion tank, turbo<br />

petrol engine, V6<br />

Cars with V6 engine: The expansion tank<br />

is not transparent. The cap must be<br />

unscrewed so that the coolant level can be<br />

checked. When the cap is screwed off there<br />

are two level markings, HOT and COLD.<br />

When the engine is cold, the coolant shall lie<br />

on or just above the COLD mark.<br />

Level markings, turbo petrol engine, V6<br />

1 HOT<br />

2 COLD


460_OM_MY09.book Page 184 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

184 Car care<br />

Brake/clutch fluid and<br />

braking lining<br />

Checking<br />

Brake fluid should be changed according to<br />

the service programme. Refer to the Warranty<br />

and Service Book.<br />

The brake and clutch fluid reservoir is transparent<br />

to facilitate checking of the fluid level.<br />

The fluid level should lie between the MAX<br />

and MIN marks.<br />

If the fluid level is too low, the following message<br />

will be displayed on the DIC:<br />

Brake fluid level low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Top up as necessary with DOT 4 brake<br />

fluid. Do not use DOT 5 fluid.<br />

Use only new brake fluid from a sealed<br />

container.<br />

The brake fluid level will fall somewhat as<br />

the braking lining wears. The MAX level in<br />

the reservoir corresponds to the amount of<br />

brake fluid required with new braking lining.<br />

If the fall in fluid level is moderate, due to<br />

normal brake lining wear, topping up is not<br />

necessary.<br />

If the brake fluid should require<br />

changing, this must be carried out at a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Brake fluid reservoir


460_OM_MY09.book Page 185 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

The foot brake and handbrake are selfadjusting.<br />

It is not possible to detect, through abnormal<br />

pedal or handbrake lever travel, whether the<br />

braking lining is worn and needs replacing.<br />

It is therefore essential that brake lining be<br />

checked regularly, as specified in the<br />

service programme.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Avoid spilling brake fluid onto paintwork,<br />

since it can cause corrosion damage.<br />

Braking lining replacement should be<br />

entrusted to a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Power steering<br />

Check the level of the power steering fluid in<br />

the reservoir regularly, in accordance with<br />

the service programme.<br />

The wheels should point directly forwards<br />

during this check.<br />

Clean round the cap before unscrewing it.<br />

Wipe the dipstick. To check the level, screw<br />

down the cap completely and then remove<br />

it again.<br />

The oil level should lie between the MAX<br />

and MIN marks when the oil temperature is<br />

about +20 °C. If the oil is colder, the level<br />

may be lower, and at a higher temperatures<br />

the level may be higher.<br />

Top up with "CHF 11S power steering fluid"<br />

or "CHF 202".<br />

Car care<br />

185<br />

Power steering fluid reservoir, turbo petrol<br />

engine, 4-cyl<br />

Power steering fluid reservoir, turbo petrol<br />

engine, V6.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 186 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

186 Car care<br />

Power steering fluid reservoir, diesel<br />

engine<br />

Battery<br />

WARNING<br />

• When working on the battery, highly<br />

explosive gas can build up. A spark<br />

could ignite this gas that collects<br />

around the battery.<br />

Therefore, always avoid sparks and<br />

naked flames in the vicinity of the battery.<br />

• The battery contains corrosive sulphuric<br />

acid. Always wear a face mask or<br />

goggles when working on the battery.<br />

• If battery acid gets into the eyes or<br />

splashes onto skin or clothing, wash<br />

the affected area with liberal amounts<br />

of water.<br />

If acid gets into the eyes or a large<br />

quantity makes contact with the skin,<br />

seek medical help.<br />

NOTICE<br />

A discharged battery can freeze and fracture.<br />

Batteries should therefore always be<br />

stored away from sub-zero temperatures.<br />

The battery is maintenance-free.<br />

If frequent short journeys are made, the battery<br />

may need extra charging. This can be<br />

done with a battery charger or by taking the<br />

car for a long run.<br />

If the battery is not charging while driving,<br />

the driving symbol in the main instrument<br />

panel illuminates and the following message<br />

appears on the DIC:<br />

Battery not charging.<br />

Make a safe stop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 187 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

187<br />

Check the drive belt, see page 188. If the<br />

belt is damaged, the engine may overheat,<br />

the battery may not be charged, the A/C<br />

compressor may not work and power assistance<br />

for the steering (diesel-engined cars)<br />

may be lost.<br />

Always connect the positive (red) cable to<br />

the positive (+) battery terminal, and the<br />

negative (black) cable to the negative (-)<br />

battery terminal. Remove both battery<br />

cables when rapid-charging the battery.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not connect the battery terminals,<br />

+ and –, incorrectly.<br />

• Serious damage can be done to the<br />

car’s electrical system if a battery or<br />

alternator lead is disconnected while<br />

the engine is running.<br />

• Cars with petrol engine: exercise special<br />

care when removing and fitting the<br />

positive (+) cable so as not to damage<br />

the battery disconnect switch 3.<br />

Turn the two retainers a quarter turn to<br />

unlock the battery cover<br />

1.9TiD and 1.9 TTiD with fuel-driven<br />

heater has a larger battery and consequently<br />

no battery cover.<br />

Battery bracket<br />

A car with standard equipment specifications<br />

and a fully charged battery can be left<br />

for up to 40 days and still have a sufficient<br />

charge for starting. If extra equipment is<br />

fitted, such as a mobile phone, the charge<br />

may only be sufficient for about 15 days.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 188 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

188 Car care<br />

Drive belt<br />

WARNING<br />

• Keep hands and clothing well clear of<br />

the drive belt when the engine is running.<br />

• Always stop the engine before<br />

inspecting the drive belt.<br />

• The radiator fan is electric and can<br />

start even when the engine is<br />

switched off.<br />

A slipping or broken poly-V-belt can result<br />

in:<br />

• insufficient engine cooling (dieselengined<br />

cars)<br />

• no charge to the battery<br />

• no A/C compressor function<br />

• loss of power-assistance for steering<br />

(diesel-engined cars).<br />

The belt tension is critical and is adjusted<br />

automatically by the belt tensioner.<br />

Wipers and washers<br />

Wiper blades<br />

Check and clean all wiper blades regularly.<br />

We recommend washer fluid for cleaning.<br />

If poor wiper performance is experienced,<br />

clean the windscreen with washer fluid. This<br />

is particularly important if the car has been<br />

through an automatic car wash, as these<br />

sometimes leave a wax coating on the windscreen.<br />

If wiper performance is still unsatisfactory,<br />

fit new blades.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Serious damage can be done to the car’s<br />

electrical system if an alternator lead is<br />

disconnected while the engine is running.<br />

The alternator is situated on the right-hand<br />

side of the engine. It is driven by a poly-<br />

V-belt from the crankshaft pulley.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 189 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

189<br />

Windscreen<br />

1 Press the two catches together.<br />

2 Hold the wiper arm and move the wiper<br />

blade out and diagonally up.<br />

Fitting the cargo guard<br />

1 Align the wiper arm’s guide lug in the<br />

blade’s corresponding slot.<br />

2 Move the blade in towards the wiper arm<br />

until the two catches grip the blade.<br />

Check that the blade is fitted firmly.<br />

Rear window, Wagon<br />

1 Detach the blade from the arm by pressing<br />

the blade’s mounting from underneath.<br />

2 Install a new blade by pressing the shaft<br />

of the blade in the arm’s mounting.<br />

The washer jet, which is located next to the<br />

high-mounted brake light, is not adjustable.<br />

Washer fluid reservoir<br />

Washers<br />

The reservoir capacity is 5.8 litres.<br />

If the amount of fluid is less than 1 litre,<br />

headlight washing 3 is not activated as a<br />

means of prioritizing washing of the windscreen.<br />

The following message appears on<br />

the DIC:<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 190 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

190 Car care<br />

Headlight washers are only available in certain<br />

markets/variants.<br />

Fill with a mixture of washer fluid and water<br />

as recommended by the table on the packaging<br />

to reduce the risk of freezing and to<br />

ensure effective cleaning, see also<br />

page 83.<br />

WARNING<br />

Take care not to spill washer fluid concentrate<br />

onto hot surfaces. Washer fluid concentrate<br />

contains flammable ingredients<br />

such as alcohol.<br />

Changing bulbs<br />

WARNING<br />

Switch off the engine before changing a<br />

bulb in the engine bay. This averts the<br />

danger of fingers and hands being injured<br />

by moving parts.<br />

The radiator fan can cut in even when the<br />

engine is switched off.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Washer jets<br />

The washer jets, which are adjustable, can<br />

be cleaned with a pin if necessary.<br />

Switch off the ignition before changing a<br />

bulb, to avoid possible short circuiting.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 191 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

191<br />

Auto checking of lights<br />

The outer bulbs are monitoring by the car’s<br />

electrical system. If any of these stop<br />

working, a message appears on the DIC<br />

(Driver Information Centre).<br />

Example of DIC message:<br />

Left dipped beam<br />

failure.<br />

Number plate lighting is only detected if both<br />

bulbs fail.<br />

The side direction indicators are only<br />

detected if the lower of the two rear direction<br />

indicator bulbs fails.<br />

Wagon<br />

The tail lights, brake lights and direction<br />

indicators consist of LEDs. If approx. 3/4 of<br />

the LEDs on one side are broken then this<br />

is indicated on the DIC.<br />

If a brake light bulb fails<br />

Sedan: If a brake light bulb fails, for reasons<br />

of safety the adjacent tail light will serve as<br />

a brake light. Replace the defective bulb as<br />

soon as possible.<br />

Wrong bulb fitted<br />

If a dipped or main beam bulb of too high a<br />

rating is fitted, a bulb failure message will be<br />

shown on the DIC (a too high wattage bulb<br />

can damage the reflector).<br />

If the following message is displayed but the<br />

bulb shines, it is most likely that an incorrect<br />

bulb has been fitted.<br />

Right main beam failure.<br />

Note:<br />

When changing bulbs, fit the same type<br />

of bulb (e.g. Long-Life) as that removed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 192 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

192 Car care<br />

Xenon light, dipped beam 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Because Xenon lamp unit is under<br />

extremely high voltage, entrust all work on<br />

the unit, including bulb replacement, to a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Xenon headlights produce roughly twice as<br />

much light as halogen bulbs and have a significantly<br />

longer service life.<br />

The lamp units consist of a gas discharge<br />

lamp containing xenon. When the lights are<br />

switched on a very high voltage activates<br />

the xenon gas. The lamps soon reach full<br />

intensity.<br />

Cars with Xenon headlights have automatic<br />

levelling. The levelling system comprises<br />

two sensors, one on the front suspension<br />

and one on the rear suspension, and a control<br />

unit by the engine bay electrical centre.<br />

Headlight alignment is adjusted automatically<br />

to the car’s load to prevent dazzling<br />

drivers in oncoming traffic.<br />

If the system malfunctions, the following<br />

message will appear on the DIC:<br />

Headlight levelling<br />

malfunction.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for Xenon<br />

bulb replacement.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 193 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Removing the entire lamp fitting<br />

The entire lamp fitting must be removed<br />

before the bulbs of the position lights,<br />

direction indicators, dipped beam (halogen)<br />

and main beam can be replaced.<br />

Car care<br />

193<br />

1 Remove the upper screw (1).<br />

2 Slacken the lower screw (2), but do not<br />

remove it.<br />

3 Slightly raise the eye where the upper<br />

screw (1) sat while pressing down the<br />

tongue with a screwdriver. Carefully pull<br />

the entire lamp fitting straight forward.<br />

4 Unplug the connector.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 194 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

194 Car care<br />

Installing the entire lamp fitting<br />

1 Plug in the connector.<br />

2 Guide the hole in the lamp fitting over the<br />

guide pin in the fitting retainer and the<br />

tongue into the recess in the lamp fitting.<br />

Then slide the lamp fitting straight back<br />

until the tongue and the upper bracket<br />

engage.<br />

3 Refit the upper screw and tighten the<br />

lower one.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 195 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

195<br />

Dipped beam bulb<br />

Main beam bulb<br />

Dipped beam (halogen) and main beam<br />

1 Remove the entire lamp fitting from the body before bulb<br />

replacement. See page 193.<br />

2 Remove the cover from the rear of the headlight.<br />

3 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and take it out of the reflector.<br />

4 Change the bulb without touching the glass with your fingers.<br />

Insert the bulb holder into the reflector and twist it clockwise until<br />

it locks.<br />

5 Refit the cover over the rear of the headlight.<br />

6 Refit the lamp fitting. See page 194.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not fit bulbs with a higher rating than 55 W as this could<br />

damage the headlight reflector. Furthermore, the car’s wiring is<br />

not designed to cope with higher wattages.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 196 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

196 Car care<br />

Position light bulb<br />

Direction indicator bulb<br />

Position light and front direction<br />

indicator<br />

1 Remove the entire lamp fitting from the<br />

body before bulb replacement. See<br />

page 193.<br />

2 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

take out the bulb.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

4 Refit the lamp fitting. See page 194.<br />

Side-mounted direction indicator<br />

1 Slide the lamp fitting forward so that its<br />

rear end can be pulled out.<br />

2 Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

withdraw it from the lamp fitting. Change<br />

the bulb.<br />

3 To fit, first engage the two catches on<br />

the rear edge of the lamp fitting with the<br />

edge of the opening. Then press in the<br />

front edge of the lamp fitting so that the<br />

groove in the spring engages the plastic<br />

edge.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 197 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

197<br />

1 Undo one screw in the wheel housing.<br />

Lower the air shield.<br />

2 Remove the protective cover. Release<br />

the two spring clips securing the bulb.<br />

3 Unplug the connector.<br />

4 Change the bulb. Try not to touch the<br />

glass part of the bulb with your fingers.<br />

Front fog lights 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Sedan<br />

1 Direction indicator<br />

2 Tail lights/brake lights<br />

3 Reversing lights<br />

4 Rear fog light (left-hand side)<br />

5 Centre brake light<br />

• Never crawl under a car that is only<br />

supported by the jack. Always use<br />

axle stands.<br />

• For further information about jacking<br />

up the car, refer to pages 219<br />

and 220.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 198 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

198 Car care<br />

Brake lights, tail lights and<br />

direction indicators<br />

Sedan: If a brake light bulb fails, for reasons<br />

of safety the adjacent tail light will serve as<br />

a brake light. Replace the defective bulb as<br />

soon as possible.<br />

1 Lower the cover in the trim behind the<br />

lights.<br />

Right-hand side: Unlock the plastic<br />

rivet by depressing the centre no more<br />

than 3 mm. Take hold of the collar of the<br />

rivet and pull it out. See also page 198.<br />

2 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

take it out.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

Reversing lights and rear fog<br />

light, Sedan<br />

Removing the boot lid trim<br />

1 Remove the two screws securing the<br />

grab handle to the inside of the boot lid.<br />

2 Unlock the plastic rivets by pressing in<br />

the centre of each rivet no more than<br />

3 mm. Pull out the rivets by taking hold<br />

of the rivet’s collar.<br />

You can use the button on the handle of the<br />

screwdriver supplied with the car to unlock<br />

the rivets.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 199 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

199<br />

Changing bulbs<br />

1 Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and<br />

take it out.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

To refit the boot lid trim<br />

1 Withdraw the centre of the rivets.<br />

2 Fit the trim in place on the boot lid.<br />

3 Fit the rivets. Lock the rivets in place by<br />

pressing the centre buttons in until flush<br />

with the collar.<br />

Reversing lights and rear fog<br />

light, Wagon<br />

1 Remove the cover.<br />

2 Remove the bulb holder with the broken<br />

bulb. The bulb holder has a bayonet<br />

fitting.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

4 Refit the bulb holder and the cover. Start<br />

by securing the cover at the bottom.<br />

Roof lighting, front<br />

1 Pull down the rear edge of the lens.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the guide lugs on the front edge of<br />

the lens and press the lens home.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 200 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

200 Car care<br />

Dome light, rear<br />

1 Remove the entire overhead panel:<br />

ease out the trailing end first, and then<br />

both sides of the front edge.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

Number plate lighting<br />

1 Undo the two screws and remove the<br />

lens.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Make sure the seal on the lens is<br />

correctly seated.<br />

4 Screw the lens in place.<br />

Glove compartment lighting 3<br />

1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting<br />

using a screwdriver.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the connector side first when<br />

refitting the lamp.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 201 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

201<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

Sedan<br />

The lamp fitting is located under the parcel<br />

shelf.<br />

1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting<br />

using a screwdriver.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the connector side first when<br />

refitting the lamp.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

Wagon<br />

1 Pull the lamp housing forward and lift it<br />

out at the front.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb. The bulb is secured in<br />

the holder.<br />

3 Start by inserting in the front edge of the<br />

lamp housing and then pressing in the<br />

rear edge.<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

(in tailgate), Wagon<br />

1 On one short side of the bulb holder<br />

there is a small slot for inserting a screwdriver.<br />

Prize carefully so that the bulb<br />

holder is accessible.<br />

2 Bend one of the contact plates so that<br />

the bulb can be removed.<br />

3 Fit the new bulb.<br />

To fit, first insert the bulb holder’s short side<br />

with the electrical socket.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 202 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

202 Car care<br />

Other bulbs<br />

If any other bulbs need changing, we<br />

recommend that you visit a workshop. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Courtesy/footwell lighting 3<br />

1 Release one edge of the lamp fitting<br />

using a screwdriver.<br />

2 Fit the new bulb.<br />

3 Insert the connector side first when<br />

refitting the lamp.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 203 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Bulb table<br />

Car care<br />

203<br />

No. Designation Wattage<br />

1 H7 55 Headlight<br />

2 H3 55 Front fog lights 3<br />

3 P21W 21 Reversing light, brake light, tail<br />

light, rear direction indicator<br />

4 PR21W 21 Rear fog light (red)<br />

5 PY21W 21 Front direction indicator<br />

6 R10W 10 Rear dome lighting, courtesy<br />

lighting 3, glove compartment<br />

lighting<br />

7 R5W 5 Number plate lighting; luggage<br />

compartment lighting, Sedan; luggage<br />

compartment lighting (in tailgate),<br />

Wagon<br />

8 T4W 4 Reading light, rear<br />

9 W5W 5 Side-mounted direction indicator;<br />

position lights; front dome lighting;<br />

luggage compartment lighting,<br />

Wagon<br />

NOTICE<br />

Only fit lamps of the specified rating. Lamps of the wrong wattage<br />

could damage the wiring harness and electronics.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 204 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

204 Car care<br />

Fuses<br />

WARNING<br />

To avert the risk of short circuiting and<br />

damage to the car’s electrical system,<br />

always observe the following advice:<br />

• We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop before<br />

modifying or connecting any electrical<br />

equipment. Incorrect installation could<br />

damage the electrical system.<br />

• Never replace a fuse with one having<br />

a higher rating than specified, see<br />

page 206. The colour of the fuse indicates<br />

its amperage.<br />

• If the same fuse blows repeatedly,<br />

have the car’s electrical system<br />

checked at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major<br />

fault in the electrical system. Have<br />

the car checked at a workshop. We<br />

recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The fuses are housed in three electrical<br />

centres: one behind a hatch on the left-hand<br />

end of the fascia, one in the engine bay<br />

(additional small unit in front of battery on<br />

certain variants) and one on the left-hand<br />

side of the luggage compartment. There is<br />

space for spare fuses in the hatch on the<br />

left-hand end of the fascia.<br />

Sound fuse/Blown fuse<br />

To check if a fuse has blown, first remove it<br />

from the panel. If the filament is broken, the<br />

fuse has blown.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 205 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

205<br />

MAXI fuses<br />

The car also has a number of large fuses<br />

know as MAXI fuses. These are designed to<br />

protect the car’s electrical system from<br />

being damaged. Each MAXI fuse protects a<br />

number of electrical circuits and functions<br />

and therefore has a higher rating<br />

(amperage) than the standard fuses. No<br />

spare MAXI fuses are supplied with the car.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Electrical centre in end of fascia<br />

A special tool for removing fuses is provided<br />

on the hatch on the left-hand end of the<br />

fascia. Simply push the tool onto the fuse,<br />

squeeze and remove the fuse.<br />

Some of the fuses and relays fitted are not<br />

connected to the car’s electrical system.<br />

If a MAXI fuse blows, there is a major fault<br />

in the electrical system. Have the car<br />

checked at a workshop. We recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

workshop.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 206 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

206 Car care<br />

Electrical centre in end of fascia<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1 15 Steering wheel lock<br />

2 5 Steering column unit; ignition switch<br />

3 10 Handsfree 3/ Bluetooth Phone 3<br />

4 10 Main instrument panel; manual climate control;<br />

automatic climate control (ACC) 3<br />

5 7.5 Control module in front doors; Park Brake Shift Lock<br />

(automatic transmission)<br />

6 7.5 Brake light switch<br />

7 20 Fascia electrical centre; fuel filler flap<br />

8 30 Control module in passenger door<br />

9 10 Fascia electrical centre<br />

10 30 Trailer socket 3; electrical socket in storage<br />

compartment between seats<br />

11 15 Data link connection (diagnostics)<br />

12 15 Interior lighting incl. glove compartment lighting<br />

13 30 Accessories<br />

14 20 Amplifier 2 Bose ® Centerpoint ® Surround Sound<br />

System 3<br />

15 30 Control module in driver’s door<br />

16 - -<br />

17 7.5 Road toll 3<br />

18 7.5 <strong>Manual</strong> climate control; fan, parking heater 3<br />

19 - -<br />

20 7.5 <strong>Manual</strong> headlight levelling switch 3<br />

21 7.5 Handsfree 3; brake pedal switch; manual climate<br />

control; clutch pedal switch<br />

22 30 Cigarette lighter 3<br />

23 40 Cabin fan<br />

24 7.5 Airbag control module<br />

25 - -<br />

26 5 Yaw sensor 3


460_OM_MY09.book Page 207 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

207<br />

Rear electrical centre<br />

Rear electrical centre<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1–5 MAXI -<br />

6 30 Control module in left rear door<br />

7 30 Control module in right rear door<br />

8 20 Trailer<br />

9 - -<br />

10 30 Left-hand brake light; rear right direction indicator;<br />

right tail light; right reversing light; high-mounted<br />

brake light; trailer lights<br />

11 10 AWD<br />

12 - -<br />

13 - -<br />

14 15 Rear wiper 3<br />

15 15 Seat heating, left seat 3<br />

16 15 Seat heating, right seat 3<br />

17 7.5 Auto dimming rear view mirror 3; rain sensor 3;<br />

sunroof 3<br />

18 15 Sunroof 3<br />

19 - -<br />

20 7.5 Analogue clock; TMC receiver 3<br />

21 7.5 Parking aid system 3; control module, rear doors<br />

22 30 Radio, Navigation 3<br />

23 7.5 Tyre pressure monitoring 3<br />

24 10 Movement sensor 3, tilt sensor 3, siren (alarm 3)<br />

25 30 Electrically adjustable driver’s seat with memory 3<br />

26 30 Right-hand brake light; rear left direction indicators;<br />

left tail light; rear fog light; left reversing light; number<br />

plate lighting; luggage compartment lighting; trailer<br />

lights<br />

27 10 Lumbar support on electrically operated driver’s<br />

seat 3<br />

28 - -<br />

29 - -


460_OM_MY09.book Page 208 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

208 Car care<br />

Electrical centre in engine bay<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1 30 Engine management system, diesel<br />

2 10 Engine management system, petrol; transmission<br />

control module<br />

3 20 Horn<br />

4 10 Engine management system, petrol and diesel;<br />

battery disconnect switch 3<br />

5 - -<br />

6 10 Selector lever (automatic); clutch pedal switch<br />

7 - -<br />

8 5 Relay for vacuum pump (brake system) 3<br />

9 - -<br />

10 - -<br />

11 - -<br />

12 10 Washer fluid pump for rear window 3<br />

13 10 A/C compressor, diesel<br />

14 - -<br />

15 30 Washer fluid pump 3, headlights<br />

16 30 Front right position light; front right direction indicator;<br />

left and right side direction indicator; right main beam;<br />

left dipped beam; front left fog light<br />

17 30 Windscreen wiper motor, low speed<br />

18 30 Windscreen wiper motor, high speed<br />

19 20 Parking heater 3; auxiliary heater 3<br />

20 10 Headlight levelling 3<br />

21 - -<br />

22 30 Washer fluid pump, windscreen<br />

23 - -<br />

24 20 Extra lights 3<br />

25 20 Amplifier 1 Sound System/Bose<br />

® Centerpoint ®<br />

Surround Sound System 3<br />

26 30 Front left direction indicator; front left position light;<br />

front right fog light; right dipped beam; left main beam<br />

27–37 MAXI


460_OM_MY09.book Page 209 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

209<br />

Relays<br />

R 1 Washer fluid pump, windscreen<br />

R 2 A/C compressor, diesel<br />

R3 -<br />

R 4 Fuel filter, diesel (preheating)<br />

R 5 Extra lights<br />

R6 Horn<br />

R 7 Engine control module, diesel; injection, diesel<br />

R8 Starter motor<br />

R 9 Windscreen wipers ON/OFF<br />

R10 Washer fluid pump, rear window 3<br />

R11 Ignition +15<br />

R12 Windscreen wipers, high/low speed<br />

R13 -<br />

R14 Washer fluid pump 3, headlights<br />

Electrical centre in front of battery 3<br />

No. Amp. Function<br />

1 60 Air pump, secondary air 3<br />

2 20 Fuel pump; preheating, oxygen sensors<br />

3 10 A/C compressor<br />

4 30 Main relay, engine management system<br />

Relays<br />

1 Air pump, secondary air 3<br />

2 A/C compressor<br />

3 Preheating, oxygen sensors<br />

4 Main relay, engine (ECM/EVAP/injection)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 210 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

210 Car care<br />

Wheels<br />

NOTICE<br />

Wide wheels and tyres with side walls<br />

that are too low can:<br />

• be damaged in potholes, etc.<br />

• cause springs, shock absorbers,<br />

wheel bearings and chassis mountings<br />

to be overloaded<br />

• come into contact with chassis and<br />

body components<br />

• affect the StabiliTrak ® function.<br />

The speed and load limits of the tyres<br />

must not be exceeded; see page 211.<br />

Wheels larger than 18" must not be fitted.<br />

Wheel offset must be 41 mm.<br />

Alternative tyres and wheels<br />

Before changing to wheels/tyres of another<br />

size, we recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop regarding<br />

acceptable options. See also page 241.<br />

Wheel/tyre combinations that are not<br />

approved by <strong>Cadillac</strong> can negatively affect<br />

the car’s directional stability, steering and<br />

braking in both wet and dry conditions.<br />

The wheels and tyres have been carefully<br />

matched to the characteristics of the car and<br />

play a key role in its outstanding roadholding<br />

and handling.<br />

Do not take it for granted that a wheel/tyre<br />

combination will work in the best possible<br />

way, just because it can be fitted to the car.<br />

To ensure that the speedometer is as accurate<br />

as possible, it should be reprogrammed<br />

if wheels of a different size are fitted. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Tyre pressure<br />

WARNING<br />

Check the tyre pressure at least once a<br />

month and before long journeys. Underinflation<br />

can result in:<br />

• punctures<br />

• separation of the tyre and tread<br />

• damage to the sideways<br />

• damage to the rims on poor roads<br />

• poor handling characteristics.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 211 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

211<br />

Note: Low tyre pressure also causes premature<br />

tyre wear and increased fuel consumption.<br />

Tyre pressure should match the current<br />

load and speed of the car, see page 245.<br />

The tyre pressures given apply to cold<br />

tyres, that is they have the same temperature<br />

as the outside air temperature.<br />

The pressure increases approximately<br />

0.3 bar (4 psi) as the tyres become warm<br />

(e.g. during fast motorway driving). When<br />

the temperature of the tyres changes by<br />

10 °C, the tyre pressure will change 0.1 bar<br />

(2 psi).<br />

Never reduce the pressure of a hot tyre. If<br />

the tyres are hot when you check them, only<br />

increase the pressure, if necessary.<br />

Underinflated tyres wear more quickly than<br />

slightly overinflated tyres.<br />

If a valve is leaking, simply unscrew it and fit<br />

a new one.<br />

Note: Remember to adjust the tyre pressures<br />

if you change the load in the car significantly<br />

or intend to drive at substantially<br />

lower or higher speeds than normal.<br />

Shifting the wheels<br />

WARNING<br />

When fitting just one new pair of tyres,<br />

these should be fitted to the rear wheels,<br />

as these are more critical to the directional<br />

stability of the car (e.g. on braking<br />

or in a skid). The existing rear wheels<br />

should therefore be moved to the front.<br />

Always move rear left to front left and rear<br />

right to front right, so that the direction of<br />

rotation remains the same.<br />

Because the car has front-wheel drive, the<br />

front tyres tend to wear faster than the rear<br />

ones. New tyres should always be fitted in<br />

pairs, so that tyres on the same axle have<br />

the same amount of tread.<br />

Mark the wheels L (left) and R (right) when<br />

changing between summer and winter<br />

tyres. This ensures that the direction of rotation<br />

of the wheels is the same when they are<br />

refitted. Fit the tyres in best condition to the<br />

rear wheels.<br />

Store wheels either lying flat or hanging –<br />

never standing upright.<br />

Tyre markings<br />

Tyre marking 215/55 R16 93V means:<br />

215 Tyre section width, mm<br />

55 Aspect ratio, i.e. the section height<br />

as a percentage of the section<br />

width<br />

R Radial ply<br />

16 16 in. wheel rim diameter at bead<br />

seats<br />

93 Tyre load index<br />

V Speed rating<br />

Tyre load indices<br />

91 Tyre approved for max. 615 kg<br />

93 Max. 650 kg<br />

94 Max. 670 kg<br />

95 Max. 690 kg<br />

97 Max. 730 kg<br />

Speed ratings<br />

Q Tyre approved for speeds up<br />

to 100 mph (160 km/h)<br />

S Max. 112 mph (180 km/h)<br />

T Max. 118 mph (190 km/h)<br />

H Max. 130 mph (210 km/h)<br />

V Max. 149 mph (240 km/h)<br />

W Max. 168 mph (270 km/h)<br />

Y Max. 186 mph (300 km/h)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 212 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

212 Car care<br />

Tyre date code<br />

Tyres should be considered as perishable<br />

goods. As they age, they become progressively<br />

harder, resulting in deteriorating road<br />

grip. This is particularly marked for winter<br />

tyres.<br />

Tyres have a code that specifies their date<br />

of manufacture. The first two digits denote<br />

the week number and the last two digits the<br />

year followed by a filled triangle.<br />

Tyres’ direction of rotation<br />

Direction of rotation is important for most<br />

types of tyre. These tyres have a marking on<br />

the sidewall. The marking can be made up<br />

of the text "Tyre rotation" together with an<br />

arrow or the text "Facing out".<br />

The tyre must have the same direction of<br />

rotation for its entire service life.<br />

Wear indicator<br />

The tyres incorporate so-called wear indicators.<br />

When treadless bands appear across<br />

the width of the tyre surface, only 1.6 mm of<br />

tread pattern remains. This indicates that<br />

the tyre should be changed.<br />

Make sure you are familiar with the legal<br />

limit for minimum tread depth in your<br />

country and also any regulations governing<br />

the use of winter tyres.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 213 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Automatic tyre pressure<br />

monitoring 3<br />

WARNING<br />

The system is an aid to the driver. The<br />

driver always has the responsibility that<br />

the tyres have the correct air pressure.<br />

Never use the system to assist with tyre<br />

pressure reading when adjusting tyre<br />

pressures.<br />

Wear indicator<br />

For optimum safety, economy and comfort<br />

tyre pressures should be checked regularly<br />

even if the automatic tyre pressure<br />

monitoring has not alarmed.<br />

The system consists of a sensor in each<br />

wheel and a common receiver. The sensors<br />

are located inside the tyre in direct connection<br />

with the air pressure valves.<br />

Make sure that wheels with sensors for tyre<br />

pressure monitoring are fitted during<br />

replacement if the car has automatic tyre<br />

pressure monitoring.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Tyre replacement must take place with<br />

great care to avoid damaging the sensors<br />

that are built together with the valves.<br />

• Remove the rear side first.<br />

• Start to remove the tyre opposite the<br />

valve.<br />

• During removal the tyre machine must<br />

not come closer than ±10° from the<br />

valve.<br />

• During fitting, start 20° after the valve<br />

and finish at the latest 20° before the<br />

valve.<br />

• Do not inflate the tyre with pressure<br />

higher than 7 bar (102 psi).<br />

Tyre pressure information is transmitted<br />

wireless to the receiver.<br />

The system checks the tyre pressures when<br />

speed exceeds 30 km/h.<br />

The system is self-programming which<br />

means that the wheels can be shifted<br />

around without any need for adjustment.<br />

The spare wheel has no sensor.<br />

Valve with sensor<br />

Car care<br />

213<br />

The sensor batteries last for 10 years or<br />

around 160 000 km. The battery cannot be<br />

replaced. The whole sensor must be<br />

replaced.<br />

The system does not warn if the tyre pressure<br />

is too high.<br />

If the system has warned or triggered an<br />

alarm due to inadequate pressure then<br />

the pressure must be reset to the recommended<br />

pressure so that the warning/alarm<br />

is cleared.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 214 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

214 Car care<br />

Valve without sensor<br />

If the tyre pressure decreases<br />

If the tyre pressure decreases to 0.4 bar<br />

(6 psi) below the recommended pressure<br />

then a warning is shown on the DIC as to<br />

which tyres are affected.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front left. Check tyres.<br />

If the tyre pressure continues to decrease<br />

then an alarm is shown on the DIC when the<br />

pressure has decreased below the lowest<br />

permitted pressure which is 1.6 bar<br />

(23.2 psi).<br />

An alarm is also received when leakage is<br />

greater than 0.2 bar/min. (3 psi/min.).<br />

Flat tyre front left.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Reduce speed (avoid heavy braking and<br />

significant steering wheel movement) and<br />

stop the car as soon as possible at a suitable<br />

location. Replace the defective wheel.<br />

The fault message can remain for up to<br />

10 minutes after restarting the car. Then it<br />

disappears if the tyre pressure is correct.<br />

Check/adjust the pressure in the other tyres<br />

when a fault message is shown.<br />

Note that tyre pressure can decrease<br />

without a puncture. The pressure can<br />

decrease approximately 0.2 bar (3 psi) over<br />

a period of three months.<br />

The temperature in the tyre also affects the<br />

tyre pressure.<br />

For further information on tyre air pressure,<br />

see page 210.<br />

Allow 10 minutes for the system to recognize<br />

the wheel/sensors positions after fitting<br />

a new set of tyres. During this period no low<br />

pressure warning or alarm can be triggered.<br />

Adjust the pressure as soon as possible.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 215 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

215<br />

Malfunctions<br />

Tyre pressure system<br />

failure. Contact service.<br />

The above message is shown on the DIC if:<br />

• a wheel without pressure sensor has<br />

been fitted (e.g. spare wheel)<br />

• one, two or three pressure sensors are<br />

broken or missing<br />

• a fault has arisen in the receiver<br />

• a system error has arisen<br />

The above messages are not shown if sensors<br />

are missing in all wheels. It is then<br />

assumed that winter wheels without sensors<br />

have been fitted for example.<br />

Removing a tyre<br />

Remove the tyre with a tyre machine. It is<br />

important to follow the instructions for the<br />

tyre machine as well.<br />

• Do not fit the tyre tool in an area ±10° from<br />

the valve.<br />

• Start removing opposite the valve.<br />

• Remove the rear side first.<br />

Fitting a tyre<br />

Fit the tyre with a tyre machine. It is important<br />

to follow the instructions for the tyre<br />

machine as well.<br />

• Start to fit about 20° after the valve.<br />

• Finish fitting before an area 20° from the<br />

valve.<br />

• Do not inflate the tyre to pressure higher<br />

than 7 bar (102 psi).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 216 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

216 Car care<br />

Spare wheel<br />

Compact spare<br />

WARNING<br />

The spare wheel or punctured wheel<br />

must be stowed under the luggage compartment<br />

floor, and secured in place with<br />

the retaining nut.<br />

The compact spare wheel may only be used<br />

when one of the car’s normal tyres has<br />

punctured. Maximum distance for the compact<br />

spare wheel is approx. 2,100 miles<br />

(3,500 km). The spare wheel, tools and jack (replaced<br />

by tyre repair kit on certain markets) are<br />

stowed under the luggage compartment<br />

NOTICE<br />

floor.<br />

To avoid cosmetic damage to a punctured<br />

alloy wheel, this can be temporarily<br />

placed outside up in the spare wheel well<br />

but only while driving to the closest workshop.<br />

As a general rule, all heavy loads must be<br />

well secured in the luggage compartment,<br />

see page 112.<br />

Sedan: Fold the carpeting forward to ease<br />

access to the tools and spare wheel.<br />

Wagon: The hatch in the floor has a handle.<br />

To raise this, press lightly on the marked<br />

section of the handle.<br />

The screwdriver handle has a "button" for<br />

removing two-stage plastic rivets. This type<br />

of rivet must be removed before replacing<br />

bulbs in the boot lid and right tail light. See<br />

page 198.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 217 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

217<br />

Driving with the compact spare<br />

wheel<br />

The following should be observed when the<br />

compact spare wheel is used:<br />

• Do not drive further than necessary with<br />

the compact spare fitted - the maximum<br />

life of the wheel is approx. 2,100 miles<br />

(approx. 3,500 km).<br />

• Refit the standard wheel as soon as<br />

possible.<br />

Wagon<br />

Wagon with subwoofer.<br />

Position the loudspeaker on the left-hand side before the spare wheel is removed. The<br />

arrow on the loudspeaker must point forwards when the loudspeaker is fitted in the spare<br />

WARNING<br />

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). The tyre<br />

can overheat affecting the car’s roadholding.<br />

The tyre pressure should be 4.2 bar<br />

(60 psi).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 218 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

218 Car care<br />

Important considerations when driving with<br />

a compact spare wheel:<br />

• The car’s ground clearance is reduced.<br />

• The car must not be driven with more than<br />

one compact spare wheel at a time.<br />

• Avoid driving against the kerb.<br />

• Do not use snow chains.<br />

• Do not fit the wheel cover as this would<br />

conceal the warning text.<br />

If the car is equipped with a trip computer,<br />

you can use the "Speed warning" function,<br />

since you must not exceed 50 mph<br />

(80 km/h). Tyre repair kit 3<br />

On certain markets, the spare wheel has<br />

been replaced by a tyre repair kit. Using this<br />

repair kit, the punctured tyre can be temporarily<br />

repaired and inflated without having to<br />

remove the wheel. See page 223.<br />

Warning triangle 3<br />

Stow the warning triangle far in on the righthand<br />

side of the luggage compartment.<br />

If the luggage compartment if full, it is easiest<br />

to reach the warning triangle by folding<br />

down the narrow part of the rear seat and<br />

reaching it this way. Folding down the rear<br />

seat backrest, Sedan, see page 110.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 219 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Changing wheels<br />

WARNING<br />

• The car jack is designed solely for use<br />

in changing a wheel or fitting snow<br />

chains. It must not be used to support<br />

the car during repair work or<br />

servicing.<br />

• Never crawl under a car that is only<br />

supported by the jack. Always use<br />

axle stands.<br />

• Special care must be taken if the car is<br />

on a slope – use wedge-shaped wheel<br />

chocks!<br />

• Position chocks behind and in front of<br />

the wheel that is diagonally opposite<br />

the one to be changed.<br />

• Switch on the hazard warning light if<br />

changing a wheel on a road.<br />

• Apply the handbrake and leave the car<br />

in gear (1st or reverse). Automatic<br />

transmission: move the selector lever<br />

to the P position.<br />

• Ensure that everybody is out of the car<br />

before jacking it up.<br />

• Never start the engine while the car is<br />

jacked up.<br />

• If possible, make sure the jack is<br />

standing on a firm, level surface.<br />

• The jack should be stored correctly<br />

under the carpeting in the luggage<br />

compartment. If it lies loose in the car,<br />

it could thrown forward and cause personal<br />

injury in the event of a collision<br />

or if the car rolls over.<br />

• Do not use the jack on a car other than<br />

your <strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

• Grit, salt and rust can clog the inner<br />

threads if the car has been driven for<br />

several years exclusively with light<br />

alloy wheels.<br />

If steel wheels are now fitted, the bolt<br />

hole threads in the brake hubs should<br />

be cleaned before the thinner steel<br />

wheels are fitted. It may otherwise not<br />

be possible to achieve the correct<br />

clamping force, despite tightening the<br />

wheel bolts to the correct torque.<br />

Car care<br />

219


460_OM_MY09.book Page 220 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

220 Car care<br />

When the car has to be lifted, the jack must<br />

be positioned at one of the four jacking<br />

points (front or rear) under the sill members.<br />

If a trolley jack is used, the jack’s lifting plate<br />

must be positioned under one of the illustrated<br />

jacking points. See page 221. If the<br />

car is equipped with a towbar, the jack can<br />

also be placed under this.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Apply the jack only to the jacking points<br />

indicated on the body.<br />

Marking of jacking points<br />

Jacking points<br />

1 Apply the handbrake and engage 1st or<br />

reverse gear (automatic transmission:<br />

select P).<br />

2 Remove the plastic covers from the<br />

wheel studs using the removal tool in the<br />

glove compartment. Insert the tool over<br />

the plastic cover. Clamp it in and pull<br />

straight out.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 221 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

221<br />

IB4529<br />

Jacking points for a trolley jack Plastic covers and removal tool Clean any rust or dirt from the contact surfaces<br />

between the wheel and brake disc<br />

3 Wind the jack up to a suitable height<br />

before placing it under the jacking point.<br />

Each jacking point is indicated by an<br />

arrow on the sill (see illustration).<br />

Make sure that the jack fully engages<br />

the jacking point in the underside of the<br />

sill member and that the entire foot of the<br />

jack is steady and flat on the ground.<br />

The jack must not stand on snow, ice or<br />

similar.<br />

Wind up the jack until it just begins to lift<br />

the car.<br />

4 Wind the jack to raise the wheel clear of<br />

the ground. Remove the wheel bolts and<br />

lift off the wheel.<br />

5 Clean any rust or dirt from the contact<br />

surfaces between the wheel and brake<br />

disc. Do not wipe away the grease in the<br />

wheel hub.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 222 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

222 Car care<br />

Do not wipe away the grease in the wheel<br />

hub<br />

Grease the surfaces indicated with a thin<br />

layer of grease<br />

Tightening sequence, wheel bolts<br />

6 Fit the wheel and screw in the bolts in the<br />

sequence shown (opposite pairs).<br />

Tighten the bolts enough for the bolts<br />

and wheel to be seated correctly.<br />

7 Lower the car and tighten the wheel<br />

bolts to torque in sequence.<br />

Tightening torque:<br />

Light-alloy wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

Steel wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Do not overtighten the bolts using a<br />

percussion nut tightener: not only can<br />

this damage the wheels but it can also<br />

make it impossible to undo the bolts<br />

using the wheel wrench in the car’s<br />

toolkit.<br />

8 Retighten the wheel bolts after twenty or<br />

so miles.<br />

Tightening torque:<br />

Light-alloy wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

Steel wheels: 110 Nm.<br />

We advise against using wheels with large<br />

ventilation slots in winter, as the brake components<br />

are then more exposed to slush,<br />

road salt and grit.<br />

If you fit wheels of a different size, the<br />

speedometer can be reprogrammed to<br />

ensure it is as accurate as possible. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Driving with snow chains 3,<br />

see page 161


460_OM_MY09.book Page 223 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

223<br />

Tyre repair kit 3<br />

WARNING<br />

Make sure no one can jog the gear lever,<br />

for example, as the engine must be idling<br />

when the tyre is repaired. There is otherwise<br />

a risk of personal injury.<br />

Do not use the repair kit if:<br />

• the damage to the tyre is larger than<br />

4mm.<br />

• the wheel is damaged.<br />

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) after<br />

repairing one of the car tyres with the<br />

repair kit.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Change the punctured tyre as soon as<br />

possible.<br />

Replenish the repair kit at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop. The sealant<br />

canister must be replaced once every<br />

four years. See the date on the canister.<br />

The handling characteristics of the car<br />

may be impaired.<br />

Driving with a tyre that is underinflated or<br />

has a puncture can damage the tyre in<br />

such a way that it is not possible to repair<br />

it with the sealant.<br />

The tyre repair kit replaces the spare wheel.<br />

The repair kit allows a punctured tyre to be<br />

temporarily repaired and reinflated without<br />

needing to remove the wheel.<br />

Minor damage to the tyre, such as a foreign<br />

object that has penetrated the tread, can be<br />

temporarily repaired with the repair kit. Do<br />

not remove the foreign object. Damage<br />

larger than 4 mm and damage to the sidewalls<br />

cannot be repaired with the repair kit.<br />

Follow the instructions supplied with the<br />

repair kit carefully.<br />

If the compressor sounds strange or<br />

becomes abnormally hot, leave it switched<br />

off for at least 30 minutes.<br />

Prevent the compressor getting wet.<br />

The sealant canister can only be used once.<br />

Replace a used canister at a workshop. We<br />

recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

The tyre repair kit can be used at temperatures<br />

down to –30 °C. At low temperatures<br />

the sealant is more viscous and so is less<br />

able to seal slightly larger damage.<br />

If a punctured tyre is to be repaired:<br />

• Allow the engine to idle. The compressor<br />

will consume some energy.<br />

• Apply the handbrake.<br />

• Turn on the hazard warning light.<br />

• Position the warning triangle to warn<br />

other drivers.<br />

The repair kit is stowed under the luggage<br />

compartment floor.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 224 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

224 Car care<br />

1 Allow the engine to idle.<br />

2 Remove the repair kit from the luggage<br />

compartment.<br />

3 Remove the electric cable and the air<br />

hose from the compartment on the<br />

bottom of the compressor.<br />

4 Connect the air hose from the compressor<br />

to the connection on the<br />

canister.<br />

5 Insert the canister into the recess in the<br />

compressor.<br />

6 Unscrew the valve cap from the punctured<br />

wheel.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 225 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

225<br />

7 Connect the air hose from the canister to<br />

the valve on the wheel.<br />

8 The switch on the compressor must be<br />

in the 0 position.<br />

9 Connect the compressor’s electric cable<br />

to the 12 volt socket (cigarette lighter) in<br />

the car.<br />

10 Start the compressor.<br />

11 While the canister of sealant empties<br />

(approx. 30 s), the gauge on the compressor<br />

will briefly show a pressure of up<br />

to 6 bar. The pressure will then drop.<br />

12 Once the canister is empty, pump the<br />

tyre to the recommended tyre pressure<br />

(see page 245). It is not necessary to<br />

remove the canister.<br />

13 The tyre should be inflated to the recommended<br />

pressure within 10 minutes.<br />

Switch off the compressor once the<br />

correct pressure is reached.<br />

If the correct pressure is not reached within<br />

10 minutes, the damage to the tyre is too<br />

large to be repaired with the sealant.<br />

Park the car in a suitable place and call for<br />

assistance.<br />

If the tyre pressure becomes too high, it can<br />

be reduced by pressing the button by the<br />

pressure gauge on the compressor.<br />

Do not run the compressor for more than<br />

10 minutes.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 226 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

226 Car care<br />

14 Assemble the repair kit and return it to its<br />

designated place in the luggage compartment.<br />

15 Wipe away any sealant that may have<br />

leaked out with a rag.<br />

16 Put back the warning triangle.<br />

17 Affix the label in the kit showing the<br />

maximum permitted speed so that it<br />

is clearly visible to the driver.<br />

18 Drive off immediately so that the sealant<br />

is distributed evenly around the tyre.<br />

19 Stop after approximately 6 miles<br />

(10 km) or 10 minutes (whichever<br />

occurs first) and check the tyre pressure.<br />

To do so, connect the air hose on<br />

the compressor directly to the valve on<br />

the tyre.<br />

If the pressure is greater than 1.3 bar<br />

(19 psi), adjust it to the recommended<br />

value, see page 245. It may be necessary<br />

to check the pressure a number of<br />

times on the way to a workshop.<br />

If the pressure falls below 1.3 bar<br />

(19 psi), do not drive the car any further<br />

but call for assistance.<br />

The most likely reason for a drop in pressure<br />

is probably that the damage to the<br />

tyre is too extensive to be repaired with<br />

the repair kit.<br />

20 Return the repair kit to its designated<br />

place.<br />

There are four adapters on the underside of<br />

the compressor which allow the compressor<br />

to be used to inflate other items such as<br />

bicycle tyres, air mattresses and footballs.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 227 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Flat spots<br />

All tyres get hot, especially on long journeys<br />

or when the car is driven hard. After the car<br />

has been parked with hot tyres and the tyres<br />

have cooled down, a flat spot can appear in<br />

the tyre, where it is in contact with the<br />

ground. The same can occur if the car has<br />

not been moved for a long time.<br />

Flat spots can give rise to vibration that can<br />

be felt through the steering wheel, similar to<br />

that experienced when the wheels need balancing.<br />

Flat spots of this type disappear once the<br />

tyres get hot again, usually after 10-15 miles<br />

(20-25 km) of motorway driving. A longer<br />

distance is required if the outside temperature<br />

is low.<br />

Seatbelts<br />

WARNING<br />

Never make any alterations or repairs to<br />

the seatbelts yourself. Entrust this to a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

If the car is involved in a collision, the<br />

seatbelts, seatbelt pretensioners and<br />

other components must be inspected at a<br />

workshop. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Car care<br />

227<br />

Check the function of the seatbelts regularly<br />

as follows:<br />

• Hold the diagonal strap and pull it sharply.<br />

The seatbelt should lock and it should not<br />

be possible to withdraw it further.<br />

Check the anchorage points in the floor.<br />

They must not have suffered rust damage.<br />

There must be no frayed threads on the belt<br />

strap.<br />

Do not expose seatbelts to substances such<br />

as polish, oil or chemicals. If the belt is dirty,<br />

wash it with lukewarm water and a mild<br />

detergent, or have the seatbelt changed.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 228 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

228 Car care<br />

Upholstery<br />

To remove fluff and hairs from the seats,<br />

door armrests and headlining, use a<br />

vacuum cleaner, a moist lint-free cloth, or a<br />

clothes brush. Remove spots and dirt using<br />

a cloth moistened with lukewarm soapy<br />

water.<br />

When using a stain remover, always work<br />

from the outside towards the centre to avoid<br />

leaving a ring. If a soiled ring or spot should<br />

remain, it can usually be removed using<br />

lukewarm soapy water or water alone.<br />

Spots left by liquids, such as soft drinks or<br />

thin oil, must be removed at once with an<br />

absorbent material, such as kitchen towelling.<br />

Then clean with a stain remover.<br />

White spirit is recommended for removing<br />

grease and oil stains. A medium stiff brush<br />

may also be used.<br />

Cleaning and caring for leather<br />

upholstery 3<br />

The principal reason for treating leather<br />

upholstery is to maintain its elegant appearance<br />

and to provide it with a protective film.<br />

Discolouration caused by dust and wear<br />

mainly affects the lighter shades, although<br />

this is not detrimental to the leather, indeed,<br />

the patina resulting from use is often considered<br />

desirable in leather. But if the leather is<br />

allowed to become too grubby, it can start to<br />

look shabby. Vacuum the leather regularly<br />

with a soft brush attachment to remove<br />

loose dirt and dust.<br />

The leather upholstery should be cleaned<br />

and reconditioned twice a year in conjunction<br />

with spring and autumn inspections. In<br />

very warm, dry climates the leather may<br />

need more regular reconditioning. Use conventional<br />

leather care products. Follow the<br />

instructions on the packaging.<br />

Do not use harsh polishing agents, solvents,<br />

sprays, coarse soap or hot water.<br />

Semi-Anilin is a leather that is dyed<br />

throughout and only has a thin protective<br />

finish and is accordingly more sensitive than<br />

a surface-dyed leather, and it therefore<br />

requires more care to retain the properties<br />

for protection and patination.<br />

Textile carpeting<br />

Textile carpeting should be vacuum<br />

cleaned regularly. Carpeting can also be<br />

cleaned using a brush or sponge and carpet<br />

shampoo.<br />

For safety reasons, vacuum cleaners that<br />

are not earthed (grounded) must not be<br />

used out of doors.<br />

Washing<br />

The bodywork must be washed frequently.<br />

When the car is new, the body should be<br />

washed by hand using plain cold water and<br />

a clean, soft brush through which the water<br />

flows. Automatic car washes should be<br />

avoided when the car is new. After five or six<br />

months the paintwork will have hardened.<br />

To facilitate cleaning, a suitable detergent<br />

can be added to the water, which should be<br />

lukewarm.<br />

Remove any bird droppings without delay,<br />

as these can discolour the paintwork and<br />

prove difficult to polish out. Lay a wad of wet<br />

paper on the patch of dirt and leave it for a<br />

minute or so. It will then be easy to wash off<br />

the dirt.<br />

Use a soft cloth moistened with white spirit<br />

to remove splashes of tar or asphalt. Do not<br />

use strong cleaners, as these can dry out<br />

the paintwork.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 229 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Car care<br />

229<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Only use liquid detergent when cleaning<br />

the plastic lenses of the front and<br />

rear lights. Do not use mechanical<br />

cleaning. Rinse off the detergent<br />

immediately, otherwise cracks may<br />

form in the plastic lenses.<br />

• The door mirrors should be folded in<br />

before the car enters an automatic car<br />

wash.<br />

• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.<br />

Wet brake discs reduce the performance<br />

of the brakes.<br />

• Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile<br />

phone, must be removed if the car<br />

goes through an automatic car wash.<br />

• Cars with parking aid system: Do not<br />

spray the sensors or closer than<br />

20 cm to the sensors with a pressure<br />

washer, as this can damage them.<br />

The underside of the car also needs<br />

washing regularly, and this should be done<br />

extra thoroughly at the end of winter. Clean<br />

the underside of the car by hand if the car is<br />

usually washed in an automatic car wash<br />

without special facilities for underbody<br />

cleaning.<br />

Never wash or leave the car to dry in the<br />

sun, but wipe it dry with a chamois leather<br />

immediately after washing to avoid smears<br />

and streaks.<br />

Clean the inside of window glass using a<br />

proprietary window cleaner. This is particularly<br />

important when the car is new, as<br />

upholstery and trim have a tendency to<br />

sweat a little at first.<br />

Keep the glass well polished, as this helps<br />

to prevent misting.<br />

Clean the outside of the windows with<br />

washer fluid. This is especially important if<br />

the car has been washed in an automatic<br />

car wash, as sometimes a wax treatment is<br />

used that can contaminate the windscreen<br />

and impair the performance of the wipers.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• Try your brakes on leaving a car wash.<br />

Wet brake discs reduce the performance<br />

of the brakes.<br />

• Fixed antennae, such as for a mobile<br />

phone, must be removed if the car<br />

goes through an automatic car wash.<br />

• Cars with parking aid system: Do not<br />

spray the sensors or closer than<br />

20 cm to the sensors with a pressure<br />

washer, as this can damage them.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 230 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

230 Car care<br />

Engine bay<br />

The engine bay should be cleaned with an<br />

engine degreasant and rinsed with hot<br />

water. The headlights must be covered<br />

over. Do not use a pressure washer. Avoid<br />

spraying electrical components and connectors.<br />

Do not use petrol as a cleaning agent or solvent<br />

when carrying out repairs or maintenance.<br />

we recommend the use of environmentally-friendly<br />

degreasants.<br />

Waxing and polishing<br />

Do not wax a new car during the first<br />

3-4 months. In fact, there is no need to<br />

polish the car before the paintwork has<br />

started to go dull through oxidation. Other<br />

than in exceptional cases, do not use abrasive<br />

polishes containing a cutting agent on<br />

a new car. Always wash the car thoroughly<br />

before waxing or polishing.<br />

Touching up paintwork<br />

Damaged paintwork should be treated as<br />

soon as it is discovered: the longer it is left,<br />

the greater the risk of corrosion. The anticorrosion<br />

warranty does not cover corrosion<br />

resulting from untreated defects.<br />

Paintwork damage sustained in a collision is<br />

usually extensive and can only be properly<br />

restored by professionals.<br />

However, you can repair small scratches<br />

and stone chip damage yourself. The necessary<br />

tools and materials, such as primer,<br />

touch-up paint and brushes, are available<br />

for purchase. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

In the case of minor flaws in the paintwork,<br />

where the metal has not been exposed and<br />

an undamaged layer of paint remains,<br />

touch-up paint can usually be applied<br />

directly, after any dirt has been scraped<br />

away using a pointed knife.<br />

If corrosion has already set in, such as the<br />

result of stone-chip damage, use a pointed<br />

knife to scrape off all surface rust. If possible,<br />

the damaged area should be taken<br />

back to the bare metal. The metal should<br />

then be primed with two thin coats of primer<br />

applied by brush.<br />

After the primer has dried, apply several thin<br />

layers of topcoat until the surface of the<br />

repaired area is flush with the surrounding<br />

paintwork.<br />

Stir both primer and touch-up paint<br />

thoroughly before use and allow each<br />

coat to dry before applying the next.<br />

Two-coat enamel<br />

As the name implies, two-coat enamel is<br />

applied in two operations. The first coat, the<br />

base colour, contains pigment, metal flakes<br />

and binder. The second coat consists of a<br />

clear enamel, which give the paintwork its<br />

final gloss and protects the base from moisture<br />

and environmental contaminants.<br />

Touch up stone chip damage as follows:<br />

Thoroughly clean the damaged area, and<br />

then apply the primer, base colour and<br />

finally, the clear enamel. To achieve the<br />

best finish, apply two or three coats of<br />

primer.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 231 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Anti-corrosion<br />

treatment<br />

The entire car undergoes a series of anticorrosion<br />

processes during production.<br />

These include electrophoretic priming,<br />

PVC-based coating to protect against stone<br />

chip damage and corrosion, and treatment<br />

of body cavities and members with thin,<br />

penetrating rustproofing oil.<br />

In addition, most body panels, such as the<br />

bonnet, doors and floor pan are galvanised.<br />

The anti-corrosion treatment on some parts<br />

of the car is constantly exposed to wear and<br />

prone to damage. This applies particularly<br />

to the underside of the car and inside the<br />

wheel arches, where grit, road salt and the<br />

like that are thrown up can give rise to corrosion<br />

where the underseal has worn away.<br />

The extent of this obviously depends on the<br />

conditions in which the car is used.<br />

Accordingly, make it a habit to hose the<br />

underside of the car often and to inspect<br />

the condition of the underseal. The anticorrosion<br />

warranty does not relieve the<br />

car owner of the need to carry out normal<br />

maintenance to the rustproofing and to<br />

make good any damage.<br />

Use a hose to clean the underside of the car<br />

thoroughly. After it has dried, use a brush or<br />

spray to apply a viscous anti-corrosion<br />

agent to any worn or damaged areas, to prevent<br />

the onset of corrosion.<br />

Even after the anti-corrosion warranty has<br />

expired, it makes good sense to continue to<br />

maintain the rustproofing.<br />

Seams in the body, especially those in the<br />

doors and boot lid, are particularly vulnerable<br />

to corrosion from the outside, caused<br />

by grit and salt thrown up from the road, and<br />

to corrosion from the inside, largely as a<br />

result of condensation. Keep the seams<br />

clean and at the first sign of any rust, apply<br />

a thin anti-corrosion agent using a spray can<br />

or a brush. We recommend that you contact<br />

an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Car care<br />

Surface treatment composition<br />

1 Body panel<br />

2 Zinc (certain components only) 7.5 µm<br />

3 Phosphate coating 3–5 µm<br />

4 Cathodic ED 23 µm<br />

5 Intermediate coat 35 µm<br />

6 Metallic base/solid base 11 µm<br />

7 Clear enamel 45 µm<br />

231


460_OM_MY09.book Page 232 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

232 Car care<br />

Service programme<br />

Periodic servicing<br />

All cars need to be serviced and maintained<br />

regularly to provide trouble-free motoring.<br />

We have drawn up a service programme for<br />

your car that takes account of all the attention<br />

it is considered to need at the specified<br />

intervals.<br />

The service programme has been designed<br />

to ensure that your car is properly serviced<br />

and to keep servicing costs to a minimum.<br />

NOTICE<br />

The service intervals have been set to<br />

ensure that the safety, roadworthiness,<br />

reliability and economical running of the<br />

car are maintained, and to meet the relevant<br />

exhaust emission requirements.<br />

Professional services carried out at the<br />

specified intervals (milometer readings) add<br />

to the trade-in or second-hand value of your<br />

car and are a condition of the car’s warranty.<br />

Have your Warranty and Service Book with<br />

you when you leave your car at the workshop.<br />

Upon collecting it, check that the book<br />

has been stamped in the right place.<br />

The scope and content of the service programme<br />

may be changed from time to time.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop, which will always<br />

have the latest particulars applying to your<br />

car.<br />

When it is time to have your car serviced,<br />

the DIC will display the following message:<br />

Time for service.<br />

Materials used in the<br />

car: reclamation<br />

Information on disposal and recycling of car<br />

material is available at<br />

www.cadillaceurope.com.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 233 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Air conditioning (A/C)<br />

WARNING<br />

• All repairs and adjustments to the A/C<br />

system must be carried out at a workshop<br />

authorised for this kind of work.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

• The A/C system is pressurised. Do not<br />

break any connections or undo A/C<br />

system components.<br />

• Escaping gas can cause eye injury or<br />

other personal injury.<br />

NOTICE<br />

• The A/C system is designed for use<br />

with R134a refrigerant.<br />

• Refrigerant handling requires special<br />

equipment and special procedures for<br />

charging and draining the system.<br />

• Never mix R134a with other<br />

refrigerants.<br />

Troubleshooting<br />

If a fault occurs in the A/C system, there are<br />

a number of checks you can perform yourself.<br />

If the fault persists, however, you<br />

should have the system checked at a workshop.<br />

We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Car care<br />

233<br />

Note:<br />

When the A/C system is running, the intake<br />

air is dehumidified. The resultant condensation<br />

that forms on the evaporator is drained<br />

off under the car. When the car is parked,<br />

this may result in a small puddle forming on<br />

the ground. The warmer the air and the<br />

higher the relative humidity, the more condensation<br />

will be produced.<br />

Inadequate cooling<br />

a Check that the controls for temperature<br />

and air distribution are correctly set.<br />

b Check that the condenser (in front of the<br />

radiator) has not become clogged with<br />

dirt and insects.<br />

c Make sure that the compressor drive<br />

belt does not slip, see page 188.<br />

d Check the fuses for the ventilation fans<br />

and compressor, see page 206.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 234 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

234 Car care<br />

Car care and maintenance<br />

NOTICE<br />

Do not use a pressure washer when<br />

cleaning the condenser or radiator due to<br />

the risk of damage.<br />

• The compressor drive belt should be<br />

inspected under the regular service<br />

programme.<br />

• Clean away dirt and insects from the<br />

condenser and radiator to prevent clogging.<br />

When washing the car, use the hose<br />

to spray the radiator and condenser<br />

(located in front of the radiator) from both<br />

sides (both from the front of the car and<br />

from inside the engine bay). Do not use a<br />

pressure washer.<br />

Caution: Do not hose down the radiator<br />

and condenser while the engine is<br />

hot.<br />

Other than in extremely cold weather, do not<br />

screen the radiator, e.g. with netting, as this<br />

will greatly diminish its cooling capacity.<br />

• Applicable to the manual climate control<br />

system during cold months, the air conditioning<br />

should be switched on once or<br />

twice a month and run for 5-10 minutes<br />

during motorway driving once the engine<br />

is warm.<br />

This action saves the gaskets in the<br />

compressor from being spoiled. The<br />

compressor uses a lubricant that circulates<br />

with the coolant.<br />

Note:<br />

The A/C system cannot be switched on<br />

when the outside temperature is below<br />

0 °C. Turn on the A/C system when the car<br />

is standing in a warm place. Simplest is to<br />

always have the AC button pressed in.<br />

The A/C system will then cut in automatically<br />

when the outside temperature is high<br />

enough.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 235 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

235<br />

Technical data<br />

General particulars ____ 236<br />

Engine ______________ 238<br />

Engine oil ____________ 238<br />

Fuel_________________ 239<br />

Engines _____________ 239<br />

Electrical system ______ 240<br />

Brake system _________ 240<br />

Wheels and tyres______ 241<br />

Plates and labels _______ 247<br />

Programmable functions 248<br />

Warnings and<br />

indications that can be<br />

shown on the DIC _____ 249<br />

Auxiliary and parking<br />

heater 3_____________ 252<br />

Mounting points for<br />

genuine <strong>Cadillac</strong><br />

towbar 3 ____________ 254<br />

3 Asterisk means: equipment not fitted in all cars<br />

(can depend on model variant, engine variant,<br />

market specification, options or accessories).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 236 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

236 Technical data<br />

General particulars<br />

Overall length, including bumpers:<br />

Sedan ___________________________ 4680 mm<br />

Wagon __________________________ 4716 mm<br />

Overall width, including door mirrors _____ 2038 mm<br />

Maximum height:<br />

Sedan ___________________________ 1471 mm<br />

Wagon __________________________ 1543 mm<br />

Wheelbase ________________________ 2675 mm<br />

Track:<br />

Front ____________________________ 1524 mm<br />

Rear ____________________________ 1506 mm<br />

Ground clearance at GVW ____________ approx. 127 mm<br />

Number of seats (incl. driver) __________ 5<br />

Turning circle, measured at vehicle<br />

extremities<br />

AWD-models______________________ 12.2 m<br />

front wheel drive models_____________ 11.9 m<br />

Luggage compartment length, Sedan:<br />

Rear seat raised ___________________ 1036 mm<br />

Rear seat lowered__________________ 1774 mm<br />

Luggage compartment length, Wagon:<br />

Rear seat raised ___________________ 1013 mm<br />

Rear seat lowered__________________ 1777 mm<br />

Gross vehicle weight<br />

(GVW)<br />

Maximum train weight<br />

(GVW + max. trailer<br />

weight)<br />

Maximum axle load,<br />

front<br />

Maximum axle load, rear<br />

The maximum axle load, front or rear, must not be exceeded.<br />

Permitted load (with driver) = gross vehicle weight – (kerb weight + 75 kg).<br />

The kerb weight (on-the-road weight + 70-kg driver) and load capacity of the vehicle<br />

are specified in the Certificate of Conformity.<br />

VIN plate<br />

Kerb weight:<br />

(i.e. with full fuel tank, full washer fluid<br />

reservoir, standard tools and spare wheel)<br />

Sedan___________________________<br />

Wagon __________________________<br />

Gross vehicle weight (GVW):<br />

Sedan___________________________<br />

Wagon __________________________<br />

1465–1760 kg<br />

1515–1825 kg<br />

2010–2210 kg<br />

2070–2270 kg


460_OM_MY09.book Page 237 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

237<br />

Maximum axle load, front wheel drive<br />

models:<br />

Sedan, front ______________________ 1150 kg<br />

Sedan, rear_______________________ 1010 kg<br />

Wagon, front ______________________ 1150 kg<br />

Wagon, rear ______________________ 1100 kg<br />

Maximum axle load, AWD-models:<br />

Sedan, front ______________________ 1180 kg<br />

Sedan, rear_______________________ 1080 kg<br />

Wagon, front ______________________ 1180 kg<br />

Wagon, rear ______________________ 1140 kg<br />

Weight distribution:<br />

kerb weight, front/rear_______________ approx. 60/40 %<br />

gross vehicle weight, front/rear________ approx. 50/50 %<br />

Max. permissible roof load ____________ 100 kg<br />

Max. luggage compartment load: _______ 80 kg<br />

WARNING<br />

The GVW and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded. Note<br />

that if some accessories (e.g. towbar, CD changer) are fitted, the<br />

available load capacity is reduced by the weight of these.<br />

When carrying a load in the luggage compartment, make sure<br />

that it is lashed down securely, particularly when part or all of the<br />

rear seat is folded down.<br />

Trailer weights<br />

Trailer with brakes ___________________ Max. 1600 kg<br />

Trailer without brakes ________________ Max. 750 kg<br />

Recommended towball load ___________ 50–75 kg<br />

Maximum theoretical towing speed,<br />

trailer with brakes __________________ 60 mph (100 km/h)<br />

When towing a caravan or trailer, increase<br />

the pressure of the rear tyres by 0.2 bar<br />

(3 psi).<br />

The above speed and weight restrictions are those specified by<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong>.<br />

Note that national restrictions may apply to trailer speeds and<br />

weights, see page 163.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 238 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

238 Technical data<br />

Engine<br />

Engine oil<br />

Type<br />

Petrol engine, 2.0 l (2.0t and 2.0Turbo)__<br />

Petrol engine, V6 __________________<br />

Diesel engine, 16v _________________<br />

Swept volume<br />

Petrol engine, 2.0 l _________________<br />

Petrol engine, V6 __________________<br />

Diesel engine _____________________<br />

Four cylinders,<br />

double overhead<br />

camshafts,<br />

16 valves, two<br />

balancer shafts,<br />

dual-mass flywheel<br />

(certain variants<br />

only)<br />

Six cylinders,<br />

4 overhead<br />

camshafts,<br />

24 valves, the angle<br />

between the<br />

cylinder rows is 60°<br />

Four cylinders,<br />

double overhead<br />

camshafts,<br />

16 valves, dualmass<br />

flywheel<br />

1.998 dm3<br />

2.792 dm 3<br />

1.910 dm 3 Information regarding suitable engine oils can be found in the<br />

Warranty and Service book.<br />

Oil capacity, including filter (oil change)<br />

Petrol engine, 2.0 l __________________ 6.0 l<br />

Petrol engine, V6 ___________________ 6.0 l<br />

Diesel engine (TiD) __________________ 4.3 l<br />

Diesel engine (TTiD)_________________ 4.3 l


460_OM_MY09.book Page 239 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

239<br />

Fuel<br />

Petrol engine<br />

Recommended octane rating:<br />

2.8 V6 ___________________________ Unleaded 98 RON<br />

other ____________________________ Unleaded 95 RON<br />

Cars that are adapted for ethanol<br />

operation<br />

Recommended fuel grades___________ E85<br />

(fuel with lower<br />

ethanol content can<br />

also be used)<br />

E85 fuel must fulfil the CWA 15293 or SS 155480 standard.<br />

Diesel engine<br />

Only use diesel fuel intended for vehicle use. Never use<br />

domestic fuel oil, marine diesel fuel or the like. The diesel fuel<br />

must have a cetane rating of at least 45.<br />

Diesel engines must be run on diesel fuel that companies with<br />

the <strong>Europe</strong>an EN590 standard.<br />

Fuel tank capacity:<br />

front-wheel drive models, petrol _______<br />

front-wheel drive models, E85 ________<br />

front-wheel drive models, diesel _______<br />

all-wheel drive models ______________<br />

58 litres<br />

61 litres<br />

58 litres<br />

61 ltres<br />

Engines<br />

2.0t<br />

Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 129 kW (175 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at 2500–3500 rpm 265 Nm (26.9 kgf m)<br />

2.0 Turbo<br />

Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 154 kW (210 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at 2500–4000 rpm 300 Nm (30.5 kgf m)<br />

2.8T V6<br />

Rating, EEC at 5300 rpm ____________ 206 kW (280 hp)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with all-wheel<br />

drive, EEC at 1900–4500 rpm ________ 400 Nm (40.6 kgf m)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with front-wheel<br />

drive, EEC at 1800–5000 rpm ________ 355 Nm (36.0 kgf m)<br />

1.9 TiD 16v<br />

Rating, EEC at 4000 rpm ____________ 110 kW (150 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at<br />

2000–2750 rpm ___________________ 320 Nm (32.5 kgf m)<br />

1.9 TTiD 16v<br />

Rating, EEC at 4000 rpm ____________ 132 kW (180 hp)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with manual<br />

gearbox, EEC at 1850– 2750 rpm _____ 400 Nm (40.6 kgf m)<br />

Maximum torque for cars with automatic<br />

transmission, EEC at 1750–3250 rpm __ 370 Nm (37.6 kgf m)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 240 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

240 Technical data<br />

2.0t BioPower<br />

Rating, EEC at 5500 rpm ____________ 147 kW (200 hp)<br />

Maximum torque, EEC at 2500–4000 rpm 300 Nm (30.5 kgf m)<br />

Electrical system<br />

Voltage ___________________________<br />

Battery capacity ____________________<br />

12 V<br />

60, 70 or 85 Ah<br />

depending on<br />

engine variant<br />

Brake system<br />

Foot brake (with ABS and EBD) ________<br />

Handbrake ________________________<br />

Brake fluid_________________________<br />

Hydraulic disc<br />

brakes with vacuum<br />

servo unit. Diagonally<br />

split circuits;<br />

ventilated discs on<br />

front wheels (some<br />

variants also have<br />

ventilated rear<br />

discs). EBD function,<br />

see page 147.<br />

Acts on rear wheels<br />

As per DOT 4 spec.<br />

Do not use DOT 5.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 241 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

241<br />

Wheels and tyres<br />

Summer tyres<br />

6.5x16___________________________ 215/55 R16 93 V,<br />

215/60 R16 95 V,<br />

225/55 R16 95 V<br />

7x17 ____________________________ 225/45 R17 94 W<br />

RF/XL,<br />

225/50 R17 94 W<br />

7.5x17___________________________ 235/45 R17 94W<br />

7,5x18 3 _________________________ 225/45 R18 95 W<br />

RF/XL,<br />

235/45 R18 98 Y<br />

Before changing to wheels/tyres of another size, we recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop regarding<br />

acceptable options.<br />

Winter tyres<br />

6.5x16___________________________ 215/55 R16 93 Q<br />

M+S eller<br />

215/60 R16 95 Q,<br />

225/55 R16 95 Q<br />

7x17 ____________________________ 215/50 R17 95 Q<br />

RF/XL,<br />

225/45 R17 94 Q<br />

RF/XL M+S,<br />

225/50 R17 94 Q<br />

RF/XL M+S<br />

7.5x17___________________________ 235/45 R17 94 Q<br />

M+S<br />

Before you purchase winter wheels we recommend that you obtain<br />

information on the sizes suitable for your car. We therefore recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Compact spare 3<br />

Wheel ___________________________<br />

Tyres____________________________<br />

Pressure _________________________<br />

Maximum life _____________________<br />

Maximum speed ___________________<br />

4x16<br />

125/85 R16 99 M<br />

4.2 bar (60 psi)<br />

2100 miles<br />

(3500 km)<br />

50 mph (80 km/h)<br />

Spare wheel 3<br />

Wheel ___________________________ 6.5x16<br />

Tyres____________________________ 215/55R16 93 V<br />

Pressure _________________________ 2.5 bar (36 psi)<br />

Maximum life _____________________ 2100 miles<br />

(3500 km)<br />

Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)<br />

Spare wheel 3<br />

Wheel ___________________________ 7x17<br />

Tyres____________________________ 215/50 R17 95 XL<br />

Pressure _________________________ 2.5 bar (36 psi)<br />

Maximum life _____________________ 2100 miles<br />

(3500 km)<br />

Maximum speed ___________________ 50 mph (80 km/h)


460_OM_MY09.book Page 242 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

242 Technical data<br />

NOTICE<br />

Snow chains<br />

Only use snow chains with the following wheel-tyre combinations:<br />

Wheel<br />

Tyres<br />

6.5x16________ 215/55 R16 M+S or 215/55 R16<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

regarding suitable wheels for winter tyres. Some models have<br />

large brake discs that prevent the use of certain wheels.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop<br />

regarding suitable snow chains.<br />

Snow chains must not protrude more than 9 mm from the tyre’s<br />

tread and its inside.<br />

Snow chains must be tensioned after a short distance.<br />

Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph<br />

(50 km/h).<br />

Snow chains must not be fitted to wheels larger than 16".<br />

Snow chains must not be used on the rear wheels.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Snow chains, all-wheel drive models<br />

Wheel<br />

Tyres<br />

6.5x16________ 225/55 R16 M+S<br />

7x17__________ 215/50 R17 95 RF/XL M+S<br />

Cars fitted with the larger brake discs (345 mm in diameter, front)<br />

must have 17" wheels.<br />

Before you purchase winter wheels we recommend that you obtain<br />

information on the sizes suitable for your car. We therefore recommend<br />

that you contact an authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

As there is a narrow space between wheel and wheel arch liner as<br />

well as certain chassis details when snow chains have been fitted,<br />

the following must be observed:<br />

Snow chains must not protrude more than 9 mm from the tyre’s<br />

tread and its inside.<br />

Snow chains must be tensioned after a short distance.<br />

Max. permissible speed with snow chains fitted is 30 mph<br />

(50 km/h).<br />

Snow chains must not be used on the rear wheels.<br />

NOTICE<br />

Wheels larger than 18" must not be fitted.<br />

Exercise care when driving on uneven roads or against the kerb if<br />

the car is heavily laden or when towing a caravan or trailer. This<br />

particularly applies to cars with 18" wheels.<br />

Wheel offset must be 41 mm.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 243 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

243<br />

Recommended tyre/engine combinations<br />

2.0t<br />

175 hp<br />

2.0 Turbo V6 AWD 1.9 TiD 1.9 TTiD<br />

210 hp 2)<br />

Summer tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 V – – – –<br />

215/60 R16 95 V – – – 3) – –<br />

225/55 R16 95 V – – – 3) – –<br />

225/45 R17 94 W RF/XL – – <br />

225/50 R17 94 W – – – – –<br />

235/45 R17 94 W – – <br />

225/45 R18 95 W RF/XL – <br />

235/45 R18 94 Y – – – – –<br />

Winter tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 Q – – –<br />

215/60 R16 95 Q – – – – –<br />

225/55 R16 95 Q – – – 3) – –<br />

215/50 R17 95 Q RF/XL – – – – –<br />

225/45 R17 94 Q RF/XL – <br />

225/50 R17 94 Q – – – – –


460_OM_MY09.book Page 244 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

244 Technical data<br />

2.0t<br />

175 hp<br />

2.0 Turbo V6 AWD 1.9 TiD 1.9 TTiD<br />

210 hp 2)<br />

Wheel sizes<br />

6.5x16, steel 3) <br />

6.5x16, aluminium 1) 3) –<br />

7x17, aluminium – <br />

7.5x17, aluminium – <br />

7.5x18, aluminium 3 <br />

RF/XL = Reinforced (eller Extra Load) däck.<br />

1) Gäller endast vissa 16" aluminium fälgar, kontakta en återförsäljare för information.<br />

2) Även 2.0t FLEXPOWER<br />

3) Gäller endast vissa AWD-modeller/marknader. Kontakta en <strong>Cadillac</strong>-verkstad för information.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 245 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

245 Technical data<br />

Recommended lowest tyre pressure, cold tyres<br />

Tyre size<br />

Load/speed.<br />

(km/h)<br />

Front<br />

bar/psi<br />

Rear<br />

bar/psi<br />

Summer tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 V 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,6/38 2,6/38<br />

215/60 R16 95 V 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,6/38 2,6/38<br />

225/55 R16 95 V 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,2/32<br />

2,6/38<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,6/38 2,6/38<br />

225/45 R17 94 W<br />

RF/XL<br />

1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

225/50 R17 94 W 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

1–5 pers./160–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,9/42 2,9/42<br />

235/45 R17 94 W 1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

225/45 R18 95 W<br />

RF/XL<br />

1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

235/45 R18 94 Y 1–3 pers/0–190<br />

4–5 pers./0–190<br />

1–5 pers./190–<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

For improved fuel economy 2,8/41 2,8/41<br />

Winter tyres<br />

215/55 R16 93 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

215/60 R16 95 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

225/55 R16 95 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

215/50 R17 95 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

RF/XL<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

225/45 R17 94 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

RF/XL<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

225/50 R17 94 Q 1–3 pers/0–160<br />

4–5 pers./0–160<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,4/35<br />

2,8/41<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

2,5/36<br />

2,9/42<br />

Spare wheel<br />

125/85 R16 99 M 3 80 max. 4.2/60 4.2/60<br />

215/50 R17 95 W,<br />

AWD-models only 80 max. 2.5/36 2.5/36<br />

215/55 R16 93 V 3 When the spare wheel has the same tyre<br />

size as the car, the car’s load, speed and air<br />

pressure specifications apply.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 246 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

246<br />

Cold tyres refers to tyres that are the same temperature as the<br />

surrounding air.<br />

The tyre pressure values in the table apply at 20 °C.<br />

Tyre pressure will increase as the tyres become warm (e.g. during<br />

motorway driving), and decrease as they cool.<br />

When the temperature of the tyres increases or decreases<br />

by 10 °C, tyre pressure will correspondingly increase or decrease<br />

by0.1bar (10kPa, 2psi).<br />

The speed rating specified in the table is the lowest recommended<br />

speed rating. For speed ratings, refer to page 211.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 247 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Plates and labels<br />

When contacting the workshop it may<br />

sometimes be necessary to quote the car’s<br />

vehicle identification, engine and gearbox<br />

numbers.<br />

1 VIN and barcode, inside the windscreen<br />

2 Gearbox number<br />

3 Engine number<br />

4 Tyre pressure and colour code (body<br />

and trim) label<br />

5 VIN incl. EU approval number<br />

6 Vehicle identification number (stamped<br />

on body).<br />

Technical data<br />

247


460_OM_MY09.book Page 248 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

248 Technical data<br />

Programmable functions<br />

Several of the systems in your car can be<br />

customised to better suit your individual<br />

needs.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

Central locking system<br />

Some functions are governed by legal<br />

requirements and cannot therefore be<br />

reprogrammed.<br />

We recommend that you contact an authorised<br />

<strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop for information.<br />

Listed below are a number of examples of<br />

programmable functions.<br />

• Audible conformation for<br />

locking/unlocking.<br />

• Standard TSL operation:<br />

The TSL function is automatically activated<br />

when the car is locked with one<br />

press of the button on the remote<br />

control (doors cannot be opened from<br />

inside).<br />

Reprogrammed TSL operation:<br />

The TSL function is activated by pressing<br />

the button twice within 5 seconds.<br />

Pressing the button once locks the car<br />

without TSL (doors can be opened from<br />

inside).<br />

• Automatic unlocking when car stopped<br />

and remote control removed from the ignition<br />

switch.<br />

• Boot lid locked when car driven off<br />

or 30 seconds after being shut.<br />

• The length and sound of audible confirmation<br />

can be altered.<br />

• You can choose whether boot lid unlocks<br />

when doors unlocked.<br />

Follow-me-home<br />

• You can choose the length of time the<br />

lights are on.<br />

• You can choose whether the reversing<br />

light or tail lights should come on as well<br />

as the dipped beam.<br />

Car alarm 3<br />

Listed below are a number of examples of<br />

programmable functions.<br />

• Cabin lighting switched on when the car<br />

alarm is tripped.<br />

• You can choose whether the Audible<br />

signal is produced by horn or car alarm<br />

siren.<br />

• The panic function is also available as an<br />

option on cars without a car alarm.<br />

Automatic climate control (ACC) 3<br />

• To increase the flow of air to the panel<br />

and floor vents, the defroster vents can<br />

be deselected (may desirable in hot<br />

climates).


460_OM_MY09.book Page 249 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

249<br />

Warnings and indications that<br />

can be shown on the DIC<br />

The warnings and indications that can be<br />

shown depend on the engine variant and<br />

equipment level.<br />

The warnings/indications that contain an<br />

exclamation mark are shown together with<br />

a warning or check light in the main instrument<br />

panel.<br />

Symbol<br />

Text<br />

Antilock brake malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Brake malfunction.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Brake fluid level low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Release park brake.<br />

Oil pressure low.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Checkoil level.<br />

xx15<br />

Water in fuel.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Reduced engine power.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Limited performance.<br />

Particulate filter full.<br />

See Owner´s manual.<br />

Coolant level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

Hot engine. Make a<br />

safe stop. Idle engine.<br />

Airbag malfunction.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Use your seatbelt.<br />

Gearbox malfunction.<br />

Limited performance.<br />

Gearbox too hot. Make a<br />

safe stop. Open hood.<br />

Battery not charging.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Headlight levelling<br />

malfunction.<br />

Tap brakes lightly<br />

before using cruise ctrl.<br />

Traction control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Stability control failure.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Washer fluid level low.<br />

Refill.<br />

Rain sensor malfunc.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Key not accepted.<br />

Contact service.<br />

Remote control battery<br />

low. Replace battery.<br />

Number of keys:<br />

Active key number:<br />

Steering lock malfunc.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Pull out key, turn<br />

steering wheel. Restart.<br />

Theft protection failure.<br />

Contact service.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 250 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

250 Technical data<br />

Alarm tripped during<br />

last arming period.<br />

Rear left seat<br />

backrest unlocked.<br />

Rear right seat<br />

backrest unlocked.<br />

Parking assistance<br />

malfunction. Service.<br />

Parking assistance<br />

sensor interference.<br />

Close doors.<br />

Left brake light failure.<br />

Left main beam failure.<br />

Left dipped beam<br />

failure.<br />

Rear fog light failure.<br />

Right brake light failure.<br />

Right main beam failure.<br />

Right dipped beam<br />

failure.<br />

High mounted stop<br />

light failure.<br />

Left front directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Left rear directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Right front directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Right rear directions<br />

indicator failure.<br />

Left side-mounted<br />

direction indicator fail.<br />

Right side-mounted<br />

direction indicator fail.<br />

Left front position<br />

light failure.<br />

Right front position<br />

light failure.<br />

Left front fog light<br />

failure.<br />

Right front fog light<br />

failure.<br />

Left reversing light<br />

failure.<br />

Right reversing light<br />

failure.<br />

Number plate light<br />

failure.<br />

Left rear tail light<br />

failure.<br />

Right rear tail light<br />

failure.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

rear left. Check tyres.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

rear right. Check tyres.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front left. Check tyres.<br />

Tyre pressure low,<br />

front right. Check tyres.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 251 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

251<br />

Flat tyre rear left.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Flat tyre rear right.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Flat tyre front left.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Flat tyre front right.<br />

Make a safe stop.<br />

Tyre pressure system<br />

failure. Contact service.<br />

Time for service.<br />

Service XWD.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 252 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

252 Technical data<br />

Auxiliary and parking heater 3<br />

Fuel-driven heater<br />

WARNING<br />

• Switch off the fuel-driven heater before adding fuel.<br />

• Never use the fuel-driven heater in a garage or other confined<br />

space.<br />

Cars with diesel engine<br />

In certain markets, cars with a diesel engine also have an auxiliary<br />

heater 3. This auxiliary heater is diesel-driven and starts automatically<br />

immediately after the engine is started if the temperature of the<br />

engine coolant is lower than 75 °C and the outside temperature<br />

below 8 °C. The auxiliary heater helps the engine reach its normal<br />

operating temperature more quickly.<br />

A parking heater addition is available as an accessory for these cars.<br />

This addition allows the heater to also be used as a parking heater.<br />

When the parking heater is running, the following symbol is displayed<br />

on the main instrument panel: . This symbol does not<br />

switch off when the heater is switched off.<br />

Parking heater 3, diesel or petrol-driven<br />

The start time of the parking heater is controlled with the DIC. See<br />

page 253. The climate control system is activated at the same time<br />

as the heater. <strong>Manual</strong> setting, see page 90.<br />

NB! The parking heater uses part of the battery’s capacity. We<br />

therefore recommend that the car is driven for at least the same time<br />

as the heater was running in order to recharge the battery. This is<br />

particularly important in cold weather when the battery is already<br />

under strain. Check the battery state regularly and charge the battery<br />

as necessary.<br />

Run the parking heater at least once a month, even in the summer.<br />

This will prevent the evaporation of the remaining fuel leaving<br />

behind deposits, which can later cause running problems.<br />

The parking heater has a maximum running time of 30 minutes.<br />

If you wish the heater to run for a shorter time, e.g. 15 minutes, set<br />

the start time to 15 minutes before the car is to be used. Heating is<br />

interrupted automatically once the engine reaches a certain<br />

temperature.<br />

The heater will not start if there are less than roughly 10 litres of fuel<br />

in the tank.<br />

When the parking heater is running, the following symbol is displayed<br />

on the main instrument panel: . This symbol does not<br />

switch off when the heater is switched off.<br />

Cars with petrol engines<br />

If the car has a parking heater 3 it also acts as an auxiliary heater.<br />

This heater starts automatically immediately after the engine is<br />

started if the temperature of the engine coolant is lower than 75 °C<br />

and the outside temperature below 8 °C. This helps the engine<br />

reach its normal operating temperature more quickly.<br />

Electric engine heater with 230 V cabin socket 3<br />

The start time of the electric engine heater can be set using the DIC.<br />

This requires an accessory kit. We recommend that you contact an<br />

authorised <strong>Cadillac</strong> workshop.<br />

When the electric engine heater is switched on, any 230 V socket in<br />

the cabin is also on.<br />

If a timer kit has been fitted as an accessory:<br />

The electric engine heater has a maximum running time of approximately<br />

180 minutes.<br />

If you wish the heater to run for a shorter time, e.g. 15 minutes, set<br />

the start time to 15 minutes before the car is to be used. Heating is


460_OM_MY09.book Page 253 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Technical data<br />

253<br />

interrupted automatically when the engine<br />

is started.<br />

Park Heater 3 and Block Heater 3<br />

If the car has an electric or fuel driven<br />

engine heater, the start times are<br />

controlled in Settings under the headings<br />

Block Heater/Park Heater.<br />

Make the settings within 3 minutes after the<br />

engine has been switched off and the<br />

remote control removed from the ignition<br />

switch. During setting the time is extended<br />

in increments of 30 seconds, if 3 minutes<br />

are exceeded. Otherwise the remote control<br />

must be inserted into the ignition switch and<br />

turned to the ON position until the<br />

text "Checking" disappears. Then the<br />

remote control can be turned back,<br />

removed and the process restarted.<br />

1Select Settings using the steering<br />

wheel buttons or .<br />

2 Hold the SET button depressed until a<br />

chime sounds.<br />

3Select Block Heater or Park Heater.<br />

4 Go back/modify using the CLR button.<br />

To now start the heater, MANUAL START<br />

( heater is switched off)<br />

1 Press the SET button.<br />

2Select MANUAL START.<br />

3 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/modify using the CLR button.<br />

To select the start time, TIMER A, B or C<br />

(heater is switched off)<br />

1 Press the SET button.<br />

2Select TIMER A, B or C using the<br />

steering wheel buttons.<br />

3 Press the SET button. The heater’s start<br />

time can now be adjusted using the<br />

steering wheel buttons. Then press the<br />

SET button, START and the selected<br />

start time is displayed.<br />

4 End by pressing the SET button.<br />

Go back/modify using the CLR button.<br />

To switch off the heater when it is running<br />

1 Press the SET button.<br />

2Select OFF.<br />

3 End by pressing the SET button.


460_OM_MY09.book Page 254 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

254 Technical data<br />

Mounting points for genuine <strong>Cadillac</strong> towbar 3


460_OM_MY09.book Page 255 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Index<br />

A<br />

ABS brakes _______________ 146<br />

ACC ___________________ 87<br />

Action in difficult climatic conditions _ 93<br />

Active damping _____________ 144<br />

Adjustment, steering wheel ______ 96<br />

Air filter__________________ 181<br />

Air pressure, tyres _______ 210, 243<br />

Airbag __________________ 34<br />

Airbag system components ______ 34<br />

Airbag warning lamp __________ 41<br />

Alarm___________________ 54<br />

Alarm, DIC________________ 76<br />

Alternative tyres and wheels _____ 210<br />

Anchorage eyes_____________ 112<br />

Angle sensor, car alarm ________ 56<br />

Anti-corrosion treatment ________ 231<br />

Antilock braking system ________ 146<br />

Anti-spin _________________ 148<br />

Arming the car alarm __________ 55<br />

Ashtrays _________________ 107<br />

Autochecking of lights, warning and<br />

indicator lights _____________ 68<br />

Autodimming rearview mirror _____ 101<br />

Automatic climate control (ACC) ___ 87<br />

Automatic transmission ________ 138<br />

Auxiliary heater _____________ 252<br />

B<br />

Battery _________________ 186<br />

Bedding-in of new brake lining____ 137<br />

Before long journeys _________ 172<br />

Belt guide_________________ 18<br />

Bonnet _________________ 174<br />

Boot lid, driving when open _____ 166<br />

Boot lid, opening_____________ 50<br />

Brake fluid, checking _________ 184<br />

Brake fluid, grade ___________ 240<br />

Brakes _________________ 146<br />

Braking _________________ 146<br />

Bulb changing _____________ 190<br />

Bulb table________________ 203<br />

C<br />

Cabin lighting _____________ 105<br />

Calibrating electric windows ______ 99<br />

Calibration, ACC_____________ 93<br />

Can holder _______________ 106<br />

Car alarm_________________ 54<br />

Car transport ______________ 169<br />

Care of air conditioning ________ 234<br />

Cars with a passenger airbag _____ 29<br />

CDC (Continuous Damping Control) 144<br />

Central locking______________ 46<br />

Cetane rating, diesel _________ 239<br />

Changing bulbs ____________ 190<br />

Changing the battery, remote control _ 52<br />

Index<br />

255<br />

Changing wheels____________ 219<br />

Changing wiper blades ________ 189<br />

Charger/Jump starting_________ 171<br />

Charging the battery/Jump starting _ 171<br />

Checking the number of remote<br />

controls _________________ 52<br />

Child safety ________________ 27<br />

Child safety locks, rear doors______ 51<br />

Child seats ________________ 27<br />

Cigarette lighter ____________ 107<br />

Cleaning the engine bay _______ 230<br />

Cleaning upholstery __________ 228<br />

Cleaning, seatbelts___________ 227<br />

Clutch fluid, checking _________ 184<br />

Colour codes, trim and body _____ 247<br />

Comfort closing the sunroof______ 103<br />

Comfort closing the windows ______ 98<br />

Comfort opening the windows _____ 97<br />

Comfort opening, sunroof _______ 103<br />

Comfort opening, windows _______ 97<br />

Compact spare _____________ 216<br />

Compressor, tyre repair kit ______ 223<br />

Coolant _________________ 182<br />

Correct position for seatbelt_______ 17<br />

Courtesy lighting ____________ 202<br />

Cruise Control _____________ 144<br />

Cruise control______________ 144<br />

Cup holder _______________ 106


460_OM_MY09.book Page 256 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

256 Index<br />

D<br />

Date codes, tyres ____________ 212<br />

Deactivating the rear window switches 98<br />

Deep water, driving through______ 166<br />

DIC ____________________ 71<br />

Dimensions and weights________ 236<br />

Direction indicator stalk switch ____ 81<br />

Direction indicators ___________ 81<br />

Donor battery, boost starting _____ 170<br />

Door handles ______________ 46<br />

Door mirrors _______________ 100<br />

Drive belt_________________ 188<br />

Driver Information Center _______ 71<br />

Driver’s seat with memory _______ 24<br />

Driving in cold climates ________ 160<br />

Driving in deep water__________ 166<br />

Driving in hot climates _________ 162<br />

Driving techniques ___________ 158<br />

Driving with a heavy load on hilly<br />

roads __________________ 140<br />

Driving with a load ___________ 166<br />

Driving with a roof load_________ 166<br />

Driving with the boot lid open _____ 166<br />

Driving with the compact spare wheel 170<br />

E<br />

Economical motoring__________ 158<br />

Electric engine heater _________ 159<br />

Electric heating, front seats ______ 93<br />

Electric windows_____________ 97<br />

Electrical centre in end of fascia___ 206<br />

Electrical centre in engine bay____ 208<br />

Electrical centre in luggage<br />

compartment _____________ 207<br />

Electrical system, technical data __ 240<br />

Electrically adjustable front seats ___ 23<br />

Electrically adjustable seats ______ 23<br />

Electronic steering wheel lock ____ 126<br />

Emergency opening the narrow<br />

section of the backrest _______ 113<br />

Emergency operation of the sunroof 104<br />

Engine bay, cleaning _________ 230<br />

Engine bay, diesel engine, overview 9, 10<br />

Engine bay, turbo petrol engine,<br />

overview _________________ 7<br />

Engine heaters__________ 159, 252<br />

Engine immobilizer ___________ 54<br />

Engine number ____________ 247<br />

Engine oil, checking__________ 180<br />

Engine oil, grade____________ 238<br />

Engine temperature gauge_______ 69<br />

Engine, description __________ 175<br />

Engine, technical data ________ 238<br />

Engines _________________ 239<br />

Expectant mothers ___________ 19<br />

Exterior, overview _____________ 5<br />

Extra electrical socket_________ 107<br />

F<br />

Factors affecting fuel consumption _ 158<br />

Filler cap_________________ 135<br />

Filling up_________________ 133<br />

Fitting roof carriers ___________ 166<br />

Flashing the headlights _________ 78<br />

Flat spots, tyres ____________ 227<br />

Floor lighting ______________ 202<br />

Folding down the rear seat ______ 110<br />

Follow-me-home function ________ 79<br />

Frequently asked questions about<br />

airbags__________________ 42<br />

Front fog lights ______________ 81<br />

Front seatbelts ______________ 18<br />

Front towing eye ____________ 167<br />

Fuel filler flap, emergency opening __ 60<br />

Fuel gauge ________________ 70<br />

Fuel grade________________ 239<br />

Fuel-driven parking heater ______ 252<br />

Functions, ACC______________ 90<br />

Functions, car alarm ___________ 58<br />

Fuse table________________ 206<br />

Fuses __________________ 204<br />

G<br />

Gear selector indicator, automatic<br />

transmission_______________ 66<br />

Gearbox number ____________ 247<br />

General information on child safety __ 28


460_OM_MY09.book Page 257 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Glove compartment __________ 108<br />

Glove compartment lighting ______ 200<br />

Glow plug, diesel engine________ 67<br />

Grade, fuel________________ 239<br />

H<br />

Handbrake________________ 152<br />

Hazard warning lights _________ 82<br />

Head protection _____________ 39<br />

Head restraints _____________ 26<br />

Headlight_________________ 78<br />

Headlight flasher ____________ 78<br />

Headlight levelling ___________ 79<br />

Headlight washers ___________ 84<br />

Headlights ________________ 78<br />

Headlights, changing bulbs ______ 193<br />

Heater, fuel-driven ___________ 252<br />

Horn ___________________ 96<br />

Horn button _______________ 96<br />

I<br />

Ignition switch ______________ 124<br />

Immobilizer _______________ 54<br />

Important considerations for driving _ 129<br />

Important information, diesel-engined<br />

cars ___________________ 132<br />

Important information, petrol-engined<br />

cars ___________________ 130<br />

Indicator lights ______________ 62<br />

Inflatable curtain _____________ 40<br />

Initial settings in cold weather, ACC _ 92<br />

Initial settings in hot weather, ACC __ 92<br />

Instrument illumination, adjusting ___ 79<br />

Instrument panel, overview________ 3<br />

Instruments and controls ________ 61<br />

Interior equipment ____________ 95<br />

Interior lighting _____________ 105<br />

Interior rearview mirror ________ 101<br />

Interior rearview mirror with<br />

autodimming _____________ 101<br />

Interior, overview _____________ 6<br />

Intermittent malfunctioning, central<br />

locking__________________ 49<br />

Introduction_________________ 2<br />

ISOFIX, child seat attachment points_ 32<br />

J<br />

Jack ___________________ 219<br />

Jump starting______________ 170<br />

K<br />

Key ____________________ 46<br />

Kick-down _______________ 140<br />

L<br />

Index<br />

257<br />

Labels and plates, location ______ 247<br />

Language setting, Profiler________ 75<br />

Lashing eyes ______________ 112<br />

Laying the car up____________ 154<br />

Leather upholstery, cleaning _____ 228<br />

Lighting __________________ 78<br />

Lighting, changing bulbs _______ 190<br />

Limp-home _______________ 130<br />

Limp-home, automatic transmission_ 140<br />

Load indices, tyres ___________ 211<br />

Load-through hatch __________ 111<br />

Locking a car with flat battery______ 50<br />

Locking/unlocking the car ________ 48<br />

Locks ___________________ 46<br />

Locks and car alarm ___________ 45<br />

Lock-up, automatic transmission___ 140<br />

Long journeys______________ 172<br />

Luggage compartment_________ 110<br />

Luggage compartment lighting _ 106, 112<br />

Luggage compartment lighting,<br />

changing________________ 201<br />

M<br />

Main instrument panel __________ 62<br />

Main/dipped beam ____________ 78<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> closing of sunroof_______ 104<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gear selection _________ 143<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> gearbox ____________ 137


460_OM_MY09.book Page 258 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

258 Index<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> tripping of car alarm______ 57<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>ly adjusted front seats _____ 21<br />

Materials used in the car, reclamation 232<br />

MAXI fuses _______________ 205<br />

Memory function, electrically<br />

adjustable driver’s seat________ 24<br />

Memory, driver’s seat _________ 24<br />

Milometer ________________ 71<br />

Motoring abroad ____________ 172<br />

Movement sensor, car alarm _____ 56<br />

Mug holder________________ 106<br />

N<br />

Number plate lighting, changing ___ 200<br />

O<br />

Octane rating, petrol __________ 239<br />

Opening handles ____________ 46<br />

Opening the fuel filler flap manually _ 60<br />

P<br />

Panic function, car alarm _______ 57<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock _________ 138<br />

Park Brake Shift Lock, temporary<br />

override_________________ 141<br />

Parking _________________ 153<br />

Parking aid system __________ 155<br />

Parking brake _____________ 152<br />

Parking heater _____________ 252<br />

Parking on a hill ____________ 153<br />

Particle filter, diesel engine______ 132<br />

Passenger airbag ____________ 38<br />

Periodic servicing ___________ 232<br />

Pinch protection, electric windows __ 98<br />

Pinch protection, sunroof_______ 104<br />

Plates and labels, location ______ 247<br />

Polishing and waxing _________ 230<br />

Poly-V-belt _______________ 188<br />

Position lights ______________ 78<br />

Power steering fluid, checking____ 185<br />

Power steering, checking fluid level_ 185<br />

Priority of audible information _____ 82<br />

Puncture repair kit___________ 223<br />

Puncture, changing wheels _____ 219<br />

Q<br />

Quick guide of LED signals and DIC<br />

messages________________ 59<br />

Quick guide, remote control ______ 47<br />

R<br />

Rain sensor _______________ 84<br />

Rear fog light_______________ 80<br />

Rear seat - fitting a child seat______ 29<br />

Rear seat, folding ___________ 110<br />

Rear towing eye ____________ 168<br />

Rear window heating __________ 90<br />

Rearview mirrors ____________ 100<br />

Recommendations for cars with<br />

automatic transmission, towing a<br />

caravan or trailer ___________ 164<br />

Recommendations for cars with manual<br />

gearbox, towing a caravan or trailer 165<br />

Recommended fuel grades ______ 133<br />

Recommended snow chains _____ 241<br />

Refuelling ________________ 133<br />

Regeneration of particle filter, cars<br />

with diesel engine __________ 132<br />

Remaining fuel ______________ 70<br />

Remote control ______________ 46<br />

Remote control, changing batteries __ 52<br />

Remote locking malfunction ______ 49<br />

Reprogramming lock system functions 52<br />

Reset button, trip meter _________ 71<br />

Retracting door mirrors ________ 100<br />

Rev counter________________ 69<br />

Reversing lights _____________ 82<br />

Roof carriers ______________ 166<br />

Roof lighting ______________ 105<br />

Roof lighting, changing ________ 200<br />

Running-in _______________ 137


460_OM_MY09.book Page 259 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

S<br />

Saab Parking Assistance _______ 155<br />

Safety __________________ 15<br />

SAHR, head restraint__________ 26<br />

Seat adjustment_____________ 21<br />

Seat, electrically operated _______ 23<br />

Seatbelt pretensioners _________ 19<br />

Seatbelt reminder____________ 16<br />

Seatbelts_________________ 16<br />

Seatbelts, care _____________ 227<br />

Seatbelts, checking___________ 227<br />

Seatbelts, rear seat___________ 20<br />

Seats ___________________ 21<br />

Securing a load _____________ 112<br />

Securing loads _____________ 112<br />

Sensor, windscreen wipers ______ 84<br />

Sentronic, manual gear selection___ 143<br />

Service programme __________ 232<br />

Servicing the airbag system______ 41<br />

Setting the alarm time, DIC ______ 76<br />

Settings for difficult climatic conditions 93<br />

Shifting the wheels ___________ 211<br />

Side-impact protection _________ 39<br />

Signalling, horn _____________ 96<br />

Signals when the alarm is tripped __ 55<br />

Ski hatch_________________ 111<br />

Sounds from in-car systems______ 82<br />

SPA____________________ 155<br />

Spare wheel _______________ 216<br />

Speed ratings, tyres __________ 211<br />

Speedometer ______________ 69<br />

SPORT mode _____________ 144<br />

Sport mode_______________ 144<br />

StabiliTrak _______________ 150<br />

StabiliTrak, anti-skid system _____ 150<br />

Starting in cold climates (diesel<br />

engines)________________ 128<br />

Starting the engine __________ 126<br />

Steering wheel adjustment _______ 96<br />

Steering wheel lock __________ 126<br />

Storage compartments ________ 108<br />

Sun visor ________________ 106<br />

Sunroof _________________ 102<br />

Switch on driver’s door _________ 50<br />

Switches _________________ 78<br />

Symbols that can be found in your car 13<br />

System settings, Profiler ________ 75<br />

T<br />

TCS ___________________ 148<br />

Technical data _____________ 235<br />

Temperature control, ACC _______ 89<br />

Temperature zones, ACC _______ 89<br />

Textile carpeting, cleaning ______ 228<br />

Tightening torque, wheels ______ 222<br />

Tilt sensor ________________ 56<br />

Tilt sensor, car alarm __________ 56<br />

Tools and spare wheel ________ 216<br />

Touching up paintwork ________ 230<br />

Touching up two-coat enamel ____ 230<br />

Towbar _________________ 163<br />

Index<br />

259<br />

Towbar load_______________ 165<br />

Towing__________________ 167<br />

Towing a caravan or trailer ______ 163<br />

Towing the car _____________ 168<br />

Traction Control System (TCS)____ 148<br />

Transmission fluid, changing _____ 181<br />

Transmission, automatic _______ 138<br />

Transmission, manual _________ 137<br />

Transporting the car __________ 169<br />

Trip computer_______________ 72<br />

Trip meter _________________ 71<br />

Trolley jack _______________ 220<br />

Troubleshooting, A/C and ACC ___ 233<br />

Tyre date code _____________ 212<br />

Tyre markings _____________ 211<br />

Tyre pressure______________ 210<br />

Tyre repair kit ______________ 223<br />

Tyre sizes ________________ 241<br />

Tyres___________________ 210<br />

U<br />

Upholstery care_____________ 228<br />

Upholstery, cleaning __________ 228<br />

Useful tips on starting _________ 127<br />

Useful tips on starting petrol engines 129


460_OM_MY09.book Page 260 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

260 Index<br />

V<br />

Vanity mirror_______________ 106<br />

Vehicle identification number _____ 247<br />

Vehicle recovery ____________ 169<br />

Viscosity, engine oil __________ 238<br />

W<br />

Warning labels _____________ 11<br />

Warning lights______________ 62<br />

Warning triangle ____________ 82<br />

Washer fluid _______________ 188<br />

Washer fluid reservoir, volume ____ 189<br />

Washer jets _______________ 190<br />

Washers _________________ 83<br />

Washers, headlights __________ 84<br />

Washers, windscreen _________ 83<br />

Washing _________________ 228<br />

Waxing and polishing _________ 230<br />

Wear indicators, tyres _________ 212<br />

What trips the alarm? _________ 55<br />

Wheel change______________ 219<br />

Wheel sizes _______________ 243<br />

Wheels __________________ 210<br />

Wheels and tyres, sizes ________ 241<br />

Windscreen washers __________ 83<br />

Windscreen wipers ___________ 83<br />

Wing mirrors_______________ 100<br />

Winter driving ______________ 160<br />

Winter tyres _______________ 241<br />

Wiper blades ______________ 188<br />

Wipers __________________ 83<br />

Work on and scrapping of airbags and<br />

seatbelt pretensioners_________ 41<br />

X<br />

Xenon headlights ___________ 192


460_OM_MY09.book Page 261 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

Notes<br />

261


460_OM_MY09.book Page 262 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

262 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 263 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

263


460_OM_MY09.book Page 264 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

264 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 265 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

265


460_OM_MY09.book Page 266 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

266 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 267 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

267


460_OM_MY09.book Page 268 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

268 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 269 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

269


460_OM_MY09.book Page 270 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

270 Notes


460_OM_MY09.book Page 271 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

Notes<br />

271


460_OM_MY09.book Page 272 Wednesday, April 2, 2008 10:32 AM<br />

272 Notes

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!